advertisement
Monochrome Laser MFP
User's Guide
Contents
Safety information...........................................................................12
Learning about the printer.............................................................14
Additional printer setup..................................................................24
Contents
2
Loading paper and specialty media.............................................70
Paper and specialty media guidelines.........................................84
Contents
3
Contents
4
Contents
5
Scanning to an FTP address.........................................................120
Scanning to a computer or flash drive......................................125
Contents
6
Clearing jams...................................................................................138
Understanding printer menus.....................................................150
Contents
7
Contents
8
Understanding printer messages...............................................229
Maintaining the printer.................................................................248
Administrative support.................................................................254
Troubleshooting.............................................................................257
Contents
9
Contents
10
Contents
11
Safety information
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.
Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions.
You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
Use care when you replace a lithium battery.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace it only with the same or an equivalent type of lithium battery. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local regulations.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to move it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage:
• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
• Lift the printer off of the optional drawer and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same time.
Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer.
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
Use only the telecommunications (RJ-11) cord provided with this product or a 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public switched telephone network.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture and walls. If the power cord is misused, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly for signs of misuse. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a professional service person.
Safety information
12
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see
www.infoprint.com/literature/workgroupconfig.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Safety information
13
Learning about the printer
Printer configurations
Note: Printer configuration may vary depending on your printer model.
Basic models
1 Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
2 Printer control panel
3 Standard exit bin
4 Multipurpose feeder
5 550-sheet tray (Tray 1)
6 550-sheet tray (Tray 2)
7 Optional output bin
Selecting a location for the printer
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any options, leave enough room for them also. It is important to:
• Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard.
• Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
• Keep the printer:
– Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators
– Free from direct sunlight, humidity extremes, or temperature fluctuations
– Clean, dry, and free of dust
• Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:
Learning about the printer
14
1 Right Side 20 cm (8 in.)
2 Left Side 31 cm (12 in.)
3 Front
4 Rear
51 cm (20 in.)
20 cm (8 in.)
5 Top 31 cm (12 in.)
Basic functions of the scanner
The scanner provides copy, fax, and scan-to-network capability for large workgroups. You can:
• Make quick copies, or change the settings on the printer control panel to perform specific copy jobs.
• Send a fax using the printer control panel.
• Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.
• Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, a flash drive, or an FTP destination.
• Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF by way of FTP).
Learning about the printer
15
Understanding the ADF and scanner glass
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings or lightweight carbonless forms).
You can use the ADF or the scanner glass to scan documents.
Using the ADF
The Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) can scan multiple pages, including duplex pages. When using the ADF:
• Load the document into the ADF faceup, short edge first.
• Load up to 75 sheets of plain paper in the ADF input tray.
• Scan sizes from 76.2 x 139.4 mm (3.0 x 5.5 in.) to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
• Scan documents with mixed page sizes (letter and legal).
• Scan media weights from 52 to 120 g/m 2 (14 to 32 lb).
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Using the scanner glass
The scanner glass can be used to scan or copy single pages or book pages. When using the scanner glass:
• Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
• Scan or copy documents up to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
• Copy books up to 25.3 mm (1 in.) thick.
Learning about the printer
16
Understanding the printer control panel
Item
1 Display
2 Keypad
Description
View scanning, copying, faxing, and printing options as well as status and error messages.
Enter numbers or symbols on the display.
3 Dial Pause
4 Back
• Press to cause a two- or three-second dial pause in a fax number. In the Fax To field, a
Dial Pause is represented by a comma (,).
• From the home screen, press to redial a fax number.
• The button functions only within the Fax menu or with fax functions. When outside of the
Fax menu, fax function, or home screen, pressing causes an error beep.
In the Copy menu, press to delete the right-most digit of the value in the Copy Count. The default value of 1 appears if the entire number is deleted by pressing numerous times.
In the Fax Destination List, press to delete the right-most digit of a number entered manually.
You can also press to delete an entire shortcut entry. Once an entire line is deleted, another press of causes the cursor to move up one line.
In the E-mail Destination List, press to delete the character to the left of the cursor. If the character is in a shortcut, then the shortcut is deleted.
Learning about the printer
17
Item
5 Home
Description
Press to return to the home screen.
6 Start
• Press to initiate the current job indicated on the display.
• From the home screen, press to start a copy job with the default settings.
• If pressed while a job is scanning, the button has no effect.
7 Indicator light
8 Stop
Indicates the printer status:
• Off—The power is off.
• Blinking green—The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
• Solid green—The printer is on, but idle.
• Blinking red—Operator intervention is needed.
Stops all printer activity
A list of options is offered once Stopped appears on the display.
Understanding the home screen
After the printer is turned on and a short warm-up period occurs, the display shows the following basic screen which is referred to as the home screen. Use the home screen buttons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to open the menu screen; or to respond to messages.
Display item
1 Copy
2 E-mail
3 Menus
Description
Opens the Copy menus
Note: From the home screen, you can also access the Copy menus by pressing a number on the keypad.
Opens the E-mail menus
Opens the menus. These menus are available only when the printer is in the Ready state.
Learning about the printer
18
Display item
4 FTP
5 Status message bar
Description
Opens the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus
Note: This function must be set up by your system support person. Once it is set up, it appears as a display item.
• Shows the current printer status such as Ready or Busy .
• Shows printer conditions such as Toner Low .
• Shows intervention messages to give instructions on what you should do so the printer can continue processing, such as Close door or Insert print cartridge .
6 Status/Supplies
7 Tips
8 Fax
Appears on the display whenever the printer status includes a message requiring intervention. Touch it to access the messages screen for more information on the message, including how to clear it.
All menus have a Tips button. Tips is a context-sensitive Help feature within the display touch screens.
Opens the Fax menus
Other buttons that may appear on the home screen:
Display item
Release Held Faxes
Search Held Jobs
Held Jobs
Lock Device
Unlock Device
Function
If this button is shown, then there are held faxes with a scheduled hold time previously set. To access the list of held faxes, touch this button.
Searches on any of the following items and returns search results:
• User names for held or confidential print jobs
• Job names for held jobs, excluding confidential print jobs
• Profile names
• Bookmark container or job names
• USB container or job names for supported extensions only
Opens a screen containing all the held jobs
This button appears on the screen when the printer is unlocked and
Device Lockout Personal Identification Number (PIN) has been set.
Touching this button opens a PIN entry screen. Entering the correct
PIN locks the printer control panel (touch screen and hard buttons).
This button appears on the screen when the printer is locked. The printer control panel buttons and shortcuts cannot be used while it appears.
Touching this button opens a PIN entry screen. Entering the correct
PIN unlocks the printer control panel (touch screen and hard buttons).
Learning about the printer
19
Display item
Cancel Jobs
Function
Opens the Cancel Jobs screen. The Cancel Jobs screen shows three headings: Print, Fax, and Network.
The following items are available under the Print, Fax, and Network headings:
• Print job
• Copy job
• Fax profile
• FTP
• E-mail send
Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it which can show only three jobs per screen. Each job appears as a button which you can touch to access information about the job. If more than three jobs exist in a column, then an arrow appears enabling you to scroll through the jobs.
Using the touch-screen buttons
Note: Depending on your options and administrative setup, your screens and buttons may vary from those shown.
Sample touch screen
Button
Home
Function
Returns to the home screen
Scroll down Opens a drop-down list
Learning about the printer
20
Button Function
Left scroll decrease Scrolls to another value in decreasing order
Right scroll increase Scrolls to another value in increasing order
Left arrow Scrolls left
Right arrow Scrolls right
Submit Saves a value as the new user default setting
Back Navigates back to the previous screen
Other touch-screen buttons
Button
Down arrow
Function
Moves down to the next screen
Up arrow Moves up to the next screen
Learning about the printer
21
Button
Unselected radio button
Selected radio button
Cancel Jobs
Continue
Cancel
Select
Function
This is an unselected radio button. The radio button is gray to show it is unselected.
This is a selected radio button. The radio button is blue to show it is selected.
Opens the Cancel Jobs screen. The Cancel Jobs screen shows three headings: Print,
Fax, and Network.
The following items are available under the Print, Fax, and Network headings:
• Print job
• Copy job
• Fax profile
• FTP
• E-mail send
Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it which can show only three jobs per screen. Each job appears as a button which you can touch to access information about the job. If more than three jobs exist in a column, then an arrow appears enabling you to scroll through the jobs.
Touch this button when more changes need to be made for a job or after clearing a paper jam.
• Cancels an action or a selection
• Cancels out of a screen and returns to the previous screen
Selects a menu or menu item
Learning about the printer
22
Features
Feature
Menu trail line:
Menus ª Settings ª Copy Settings ª
Number of Copies
Attendance message alert
Description
A Menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen. This feature acts as a trail, showing the path taken to arrive at the current menu. It gives the exact location within the menus.
Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu or menu item.
The Number of Copies is not underlined since this is the current screen. If you touch an underlined word on the Number of Copies screen before the Number of Copies is set and saved, then the selection is not saved, and it does not become the user default setting.
If an attendance message occurs which closes a function, such as copy or fax, then a solid red dot appears over the function button on the home screen. This indicates that an attendance message exists.
Learning about the printer
23
Additional printer setup
Installing internal options
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
You can customize your printer connectivity and memory capacity by adding optional cards. The instructions in this section explain how to install the available cards; you can also use them to locate a card for removal.
All the listed options may not be available. For more information, contact the place where you purchased the printer.
Available internal options
• Memory cards
– Printer memory
– Flash memory
– Fonts
• Firmware cards
– Bar Code and Forms
– IPDS and SCS/TNe
– PrintCryption TM
– PRESCRIBE
• Printer hard disk
• Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)
– RS-232-C Serial ISP
– Parallel 1284-B ISP
– MarkNet TM N8150802.11 b/g/n Wireless ISP
– MarkNet N8130 10/100 Fiber ISP
– MarkNet N8120 10/100/1000 Ethernet ISP
• MarkNet N8110 V-34 Fax Card
Additional printer setup
24
Accessing the system board to install internal options
Note: This operation requires a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
1 Open the system board door.
2 Loosen the screw(s) on the system board cover.
Additional printer setup
25
3 Remove the system board cover.
4 Use the illustration below to locate the appropriate connector.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1 Firmware and flash memory card connectors
2 Memory card connector
3 Internal Solutions Port or printer hard disk connector
4 Fax card connector
Additional printer setup
26
Installing a memory card
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the system board. To install the memory card:
1 Access the system board.
2 Unpack the memory card.
Note: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.
3 Open the memory card connector latches.
Additional printer setup
27
4 Align the notches on the memory card with the ridges on the connector.
1 Notches
2 Ridges
5 Push the memory card straight into the connector until it snaps into place.
6 Replace the system board cover and close the system board door.
Installing a flash memory or firmware card
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
Additional printer setup
28
The system board has two connections for an optional flash memory or firmware card. Only one of each may be installed, but the connectors are interchangeable.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the system board.
2 Unpack the card.
Note: Avoid touching any electrical components on the card.
3 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins on the card with the holes on the system board.
1 Plastic pins
2 Metal pins
Additional printer setup
29
4 Push the card firmly into place.
Notes:
• The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board.
• Be careful not to damage the connectors.
5 Replace the system board cover and close the system board door.
Additional printer setup
30
Installing an Internal Solutions Port
The system board supports one optional Internal Solutions Port (ISP). Install an ISP for additional connectivity options.
Note: This operation requires a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the system board.
2 Unpack the ISP and plastic tee.
Note: Avoid touching the components on the card.
3 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board.
Note: If an optional printer hard disk is currently installed, then the printer hard disk must first be removed. To remove the hard disk:
Additional printer setup
31
a Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the system board, leaving the cable attached to the printer hard disk. To unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before pulling the cable out.
b Remove the screws holding the printer hard disk in place.
c Remove the printer hard disk by pulling it upward to unseat the standoffs.
Additional printer setup
32
d Remove the thumbscrews that attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket to the printer hard disk, and then remove the bracket. Set the printer hard disk aside.
4 Remove the metal cover from the ISP opening.
Additional printer setup
33
5 Align the posts of the plastic tee to the holes in the system board, and then press downward until the tee snaps into place. Be sure each post of the tee has latched completely, and that the tee is seated firmly onto the system board.
6 Install the ISP onto the plastic tee. Angle the ISP over the plastic tee, and then approach the plastic tee so that any overhanging connectors will pass through the ISP opening in the system board cage.
Additional printer setup
34
7 Lower the ISP toward the plastic tee until the ISP is seated between the guides of the plastic tee.
8 Insert the long thumbscrew and turn it clockwise enough to hold the ISP in place, but do not tighten the thumbscrew at this time.
Additional printer setup
35
9 Attach the two provided screws to secure the ISP mounting bracket to the system board cage.
10 Tighten the long thumbscrew.
Note: Do not overtighten the thumbscrew.
11 Insert the plug of the ISP interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color coded.
12 If a printer hard disk was previously installed, then attach the printer hard disk to the ISP. For more information,
see “Installing a printer hard disk” on page 37.
Additional printer setup
36
13 Replace the system board cover and close the system board door.
Installing a printer hard disk
The optional printer hard disk can be installed with or without an Internal Solutions Port (ISP).
Note: This operation requires a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the system board.
2 Unpack the printer hard disk.
Note: Avoid touching the components on the card.
Additional printer setup
37
3 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board.
Note: If an optional ISP is currently installed, then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP.
To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP: a Using a flathead screwdriver to loosen the screws, remove the thumbscrews that attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket to the printer hard disk, and then remove the bracket.
b Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk with the holes in the ISP, and then press downward on the printer hard disk until the standoffs have seated into place.
Additional printer setup
38
c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color coded.
To install a printer hard disk directly onto the system board: a Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk with the holes in the system board, and then press downward on the printer hard disk until the standoffs have seated into place.
Additional printer setup
39
b Attach the two provided screws to secure the printer hard disk mounting bracket.
c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color coded.
4 Replace the system board cover and close the system board door.
Additional printer setup
40
Installing a fax card
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the system board.
2 Unpack the fax card.
3 Remove the metal cover from the fax card opening.
Additional printer setup
41
4 Insert the fax card and attach the two provided screws to secure the fax card mounting bracket.
Additional printer setup
42
5 Insert the plug of the fax card interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.
6 Replace the system board cover and close the system board door.
Attaching cables
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or Ethernet cable.
Be sure to match the following:
• The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer
• The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port
Additional printer setup
43
1 USB port
2 Ethernet port
Verifying printer setup
Once all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up correctly by printing the following:
• Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed options appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly. Remove the option and install it again.
• Network setup page—If your printer is a network model and is attached to a network, print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
Printing a menu settings page
Print a menu settings page to review the current menu settings and to verify printer options are installed correctly.
Note: If you have not made any menu item settings changes yet, then the menu settings page lists all the factory default settings. Once you select and save other settings from the menus, they replace the factory default settings as user default settings . A user default setting remains in effect until you access the menu again, choose another value,
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch .
Additional printer setup
44
3 Touch Reports.
4 Touch Menu Settings Page.
The menu settings page prints and the printer returns to the home screen.
Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch .
3 Touch Reports.
4 Touch Network Setup Page.
The network setup page prints and the printer returns to the home screen.
5 Check the first section on the network setup page, and confirm that Status is “Connected.”
If Status is “Not Connected,” the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning. Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.
Setting up the printer software
Installing printer software
A printer driver is software that lets the computer communicate with the printer. The printer software is typically installed during the initial printer setup. If you need to install the software after setup, follow these instructions:
For Windows users
1 Close all open software programs.
2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.
3 From the main installation dialog, click Install.
4 Follow the instructions on the screen.
For Macintosh users
1 Close all open software applications.
2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.
3 From the Finder desktop, double-click the printer CD icon that automatically appears.
4 Double-click the Install icon.
5 Follow the instructions on the screen.
Additional printer setup
45
Updating available options in the printer driver
Once the printer software and any options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs.
For Windows users
1 Do one of the following:
In Windows Vista
a Click .
b Click Control Panel.
c Click Hardware and Sound.
d Click Printers.
In Windows XP
a Click Start.
b Click Printers and Faxes.
In Windows 2000
a Click Start.
b Click Settings ª Printers.
2 Select the printer.
3 Right-click the printer, and then select Properties.
4 Click the Install Options tab.
5 Under Available Options, add any installed hardware options.
6 Click Apply.
For Macintosh users
In Mac OS X version 10.5
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
2 Click Print & Fax.
3 Select the printer, and then click Options & Supplies.
4 Click Driver, and then add any installed hardware options.
5 Click OK.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier
1 From the Go menu, choose Applications.
2 Double-click Utilities, and then double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
3 Select the printer, and then from the Printers menu, choose Show Info.
Additional printer setup
46
4 From the pop-up menu, choose Installable Options.
5 Add any installed hardware options, and then click Apply Changes.
Setting up wireless printing
Information you will need to set up the printer on a wireless network
Note: Do not connect the installation or network cables until prompted to do so by the setup software.
• SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
• Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode will be either infrastructure or ad hoc.
• Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to auto for infrastructure networks.
Some ad hoc networks will also require the auto setting. Check with your system support person if you are not sure which channel to select.
• Security Method—There are three basic options for Security Method:
– WEP key
If your network uses more than one WEP key, enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key currently in use on the network by selecting the Default WEP Transmit Key.
or
– WPA or WPA2 passphrase
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the network.
– No security
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.
Note: Using an unsecured wireless network is not recommended.
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network using the Advanced method, then you may need the following:
• Authentication type
• Inner authentication type
• 802.1X username and password
• Certificates
Note: For more information on configuring 802.1X security, see the Networking Guide on the Software and
Documentation CD.
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows)
Before you install the printer on a wireless network, make sure that:
• Your wireless network is set up and working properly.
• The computer you are using is connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up the printer.
Additional printer setup
47
1 Connect the power cable, and then turn the printer on.
Make sure the printer and computer are fully on and ready.
Do not connect the USB cable until instructed to do so on the screen
2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.
3 Click Install.
4 Click Agree.
5 Click Suggested.
6 Click Wireless Network Attach.
Additional printer setup
48
7 Connect the cables in the following order: a Temporarily connect a USB cable between the computer on the wireless network and the printer.
Note: After the printer is configured, the software will instruct you to disconnect the temporary USB cable so you can print wirelessly.
b If your printer has faxing capabilities, then connect the telephone cable.
8 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the software installation.
9 To allow other computers on the wireless network to use the wireless printer, follow steps 2 through 6 and step
8 for each computer.
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh)
Prepare to configure the printer
1 Locate the printer MAC address on the sheet that came with the printer. Write the last six digits of the MAC address in the space provided below:
MAC address: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
2 If your printer has faxing capabilities, then connect the telephone cable.
Additional printer setup
49
3 Connect the power cable, and then turn the power on.
Enter the printer information
1 Access the AirPort options.
In Mac OS X version 10.5
a From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
b Click Network.
c Click AirPort.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier
a From the Go menu, choose Applications.
b Double-click Internet Connect.
c From the toolbar, click AirPort.
2 From the Network pop-up menu, select print server xxxxxx, where the x’s are the last six digits of the MAC address located on the MAC address sheet.
3 Open the Safari browser.
4 From the Bookmarks drop-down menu, select Show.
5 Under Collections, select Bonjour or Rendevous, and then double-click the printer name.
6 From the main page of the Embedded Web Server, navigate to the page where the wireless settings information is stored.
Configure the printer for wireless access
1 Type the name of your network (SSID) in the appropriate field.
2 Select Infrastructure as your Network Mode if you are using a wireless router.
3 Select the type of security you use to protect your wireless network.
Additional printer setup
50
4 Enter the security information necessary for the printer to join your wireless network.
5 Click Submit.
6 Open the AirPort application on your computer:
In Mac OS X version 10.5
a From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
b Click Network.
c Click AirPort.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier
a From the Go menu, choose Applications.
b Double-click Internet Connect.
c From the toolbar, click AirPort.
7 From the Network pop-up menu, select your wireless network.
Configure your computer to use the printer wirelessly
To print to a network printer, each Macintosh user must install a custom PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file and create a printer in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
1 Install a PPD file on the computer: a Insert the Software and Documentation CD in the CD or DVD drive.
b Double-click the installer package for the printer.
c From the Welcome screen, click Continue.
d Click Continue again after viewing the Readme file.
e Click Continue after viewing the license agreement, and then click Agree to accept the terms of the agreement.
f Select a Destination, and then click Continue.
g From the Easy Install screen, click Install.
h Type the user password, and then click OK.
All necessary software is installed on the computer.
i Click Close when installation is complete.
2 Add the printer: a For IP printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
2 Click Print & Fax.
3 Click +.
4 Select the printer from the list.
5 Click Add.
Additional printer setup
51
In Mac OS X version 10.4
1 From the Go menu, choose Applications.
2 Double-click Utilities.
3 Locate and double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
4 From the Printer List, choose Add.
5 Select the printer from the list.
6 Click Add.
b For AppleTalk printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
2 Click Print & Fax.
3 Click +.
4 Click AppleTalk.
5 Select the printer from the list.
6 Click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4
1 From the Go menu, choose Applications.
2 Double-click Utilities.
3 Locate and double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
4 From the Printer List, choose Add.
5 Choose the Default Browser tab.
6 Click More Printers.
7 From the first pop-up menu, choose AppleTalk.
8 From the second pop-up menu, select Local AppleTalk zone.
9 Select the printer from the list.
10 Click Add.
Installing the printer on a wired network
Use the following instructions to install the printer on a wired network. These instructions apply to Ethernet and fiber optic network connections.
Before you install the printer on a wired network, make sure that:
• You have completed the initial setup of the printer.
• The printer is connected to your network with the appropriate type of cable.
For Windows users
1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.
Wait for the Welcome screen to appear.
If the CD does not launch after a minute, then do one of the following:
Additional printer setup
52
In Windows Vista a Click .
b In the Start Search box, type D:\setup.exe
, where D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
In Windows XP and earlier a Click Start.
b Click Run.
c Type D:\setup.exe
, where D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
2 Click Install Printer and Software.
3 Click Agree to agree to the License Agreement.
4 Select Suggested, and then click Next.
Note: To configure the printer using a static IP address, using IPv6, or to configure printers using scripts, select
Custom and follow the on-screen instructions.
5 Select Wired Network Attach, and then click Next.
6 Select the printer manufacturer from the list.
7 Select the printer model from the list, and then click Next.
8 Select the printer from the list of printers discovered on the network, and then click Finish.
Note: If your configured printer does not appear in the list of discovered printers, click Add Port and follow the on-screen instructions.
9 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.
For Macintosh users
1 Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer.
2
3 Locate the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section of the network setup page. You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.
4 Install the drivers and add the printer.
a Install a PPD file on the computer:
1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD in the CD or DVD drive.
2 Double-click the installer package for the printer.
3 From the Welcome screen, click Continue.
4 Click Continue again after viewing the Readme file.
5 Click Continue after viewing the license agreement, and then click Agree to accept the terms of the agreement.
6 Select a Destination, and then click Continue.
7 From the Easy Install screen, click Install.
Additional printer setup
53
8 Type the user password, and then click OK.
All the necessary software is installed on the computer.
9 Click Close when installation is complete.
b Add the printer:
• For IP printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
2 Click Print & Fax.
3 Click +.
4 Select the printer from the list.
5 Click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier
1 From the Go menu, choose Applications.
2 Double-click Utilities.
3 Double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
4 From the Printer List, click Add.
5 Select the printer from the list.
6 Click Add.
• For AppleTalk printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
2 Click Print & Fax.
3 Click +.
4 Click AppleTalk.
5 Select the printer from the list.
6 Click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier
1 From the Go menu, choose Applications.
2 Double-click Utilities.
3 Double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
4 From the Printer List, click Add.
5 Choose the Default Browser tab.
6 Click More Printers.
7 From the first pop-up menu, choose AppleTalk.
8 From the second pop-up menu, select Local AppleTalk zone.
9 Select the printer from the list.
10 Click Add.
Note: If the printer doesn't show up in the list, you may need to add it using the IP address. Contact your system support person for assistance.
Additional printer setup
54
Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port
When a new network Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed in the printer, the printer configurations on computers that access the printer must be updated because the printer will be assigned a new IP address. All computers that access the printer must be updated with this new IP address in order to print to it over the network.
Notes:
• If the printer has a static IP address that will stay the same, then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations.
• If the computers are configured to print to the printer by a network name that will stay the same, instead of by
IP address, then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations.
• If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for a wired connection, then make sure the wired network is disconnected when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly. If the wired connection remains connected, then the wireless configuration will complete, but the wireless ISP will not be active. This can be fixed by disconnecting the wired connection, turning the printer off, and then turning the printer back on again.
For Windows users
1 Print a network setup page and make a note of the new IP address.
2 Do one of the following:
In Windows Vista a Click .
b Click Control Panel.
c Under Hardware and Sound, click Printer.
In Windows XP a Click Start.
b Click Printers and Faxes.
In Windows 2000 a Click Start.
b Click Settings ª Printers.
3 Locate the printer that has changed.
Note: If there is more than one copy of the printer, then update all of them with the new IP address.
4 Right-click the printer.
5 Click Properties.
6 Click the Ports tab.
7 Locate the port in the list, and then select it.
8 Click Configure Port.
Additional printer setup
55
9 Type the new IP address in the “Printer Name or IP Address” field. You can find the new IP address on the network setup page you printed in step 1.
10 Click OK, and then click Close.
For Mac users
1 Print a network setup page and make a note of the new IP address.
2 Locate the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section of the network setup page. You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.
3 Add the printer:
• For IP printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5
a From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
b Click Print & Fax.
c Click +.
d Select the printer from the list.
e Click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier a From the Go menu, choose Applications.
b Double-click Utilities.
c Double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
d From the Printer List, click Add.
e Select the printer from the list.
f Click Add.
• For AppleTalk printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5
a From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
b Click Print & Fax.
c Click +.
d Click AppleTalk.
e Select the printer from the list.
f Click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier a From the Go menu, choose Applications.
b Double-click Utilities.
c Double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
d From the Printer List, click Add.
e Choose the Default Browser tab.
f Click More Printers.
g From the first pop-up menu, choose AppleTalk.
Additional printer setup
56
h From the second pop-up menu, select Local AppleTalk zone.
i Select the printer from the list.
j Click Add.
Setting up serial printing
In serial printing, data is transferred one bit at a time. Although serial printing is usually slower than parallel printing, it is the preferred option when there is a great deal of distance between the printer and computer or when an interface with a better transfer rate is not available.
After installing the serial port, you will need to configure the printer and the computer so they can communicate.
Make sure you have connected the serial cable to the serial port on your printer.
1 Set the parameters in the printer: a From the printer control panel, navigate to the menu with port settings.
b Locate the submenu with serial port settings.
c Make any necessary changes to the serial settings.
d Save the new settings.
e Print a menu settings page.
2 Install the printer driver: a Insert the Software and Documentation CD. It launches automatically.
If the CD does not launch automatically, do one of the following:
In Windows Vista
1 Click .
2 In the Start Search box, type D:\setup.exe
, where D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
In Windows XP and earlier
1 Click Start.
2 Click Run.
3 Type D:\setup.exe
, where D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
b Click Install Printer and Software.
c Click Agree to accept the Printer Software License Agreement.
d Click Custom.
e Make sure Select Components is selected, and then click Next.
f Make sure Local is selected, and then click Next.
g Select the manufacturer of the printer from the menu.
h Select the printer model from the menu, and then click Add Printer.
i Click the + beside the printer model under Select Components.
j Make sure the correct port is available under Select Components. This is the port where the serial cable attaches to the computer. If the correct port is not available, select the port under the Select Port menu, and then click
Add Port.
Additional printer setup
57
k Make any configuration changes necessary in the Add a New Port window. Click Add Port to finish adding the port.
l Make sure the box next to the selected printer model is checked.
m Select any other optional software you want to install, and then click Next.
n Click Finish to complete the printer software installation.
3 Set the COM port parameters:
After the printer driver is installed, you must set the serial parameters in the communications (COM) port assigned to the printer driver.
The serial parameters in the COM port must match the serial parameters you set in the printer.
a Open the Device Manager. Do one of the following:
In Windows Vista
1 Click .
2 Click Control Panel.
3 Click System and Maintenance.
4 Click System.
5 Click Device Manager.
In Windows XP
1 Click Start.
2 Click Control Panel.
3 Click Performance and Maintenance.
4 Click System.
5 From the Hardware tab, click Device Manager.
In Windows 2000
1 Click Start.
2 Click Settings ª Control Panel.
3 Click System.
4 From the Hardware tab, click Device Manager.
b Click + to expand the list of available ports.
c Select the communications port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).
d Click Properties.
e On the Port Settings tab, set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters in the printer.
Look for the printer settings under the serial heading on the Menu Settings page you printed earlier.
f Click OK, and then close all the windows.
g Print a test page to verify printer installation. When a test page prints successfully, printer setup is complete.
Additional printer setup
58
Setting up the printer to fax
Note: Fax capabilities may not be available on all printer models.
The following connection methods may not be applicable in all countries or regions.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.
Choosing a fax connection
You can connect the printer with equipment such as a telephone, an answering machine, or a computer modem.
Note: The printer is an analog device that works best when directly connected to the wall jack. Other devices (such as a telephone or answering machine) can be successfully attached to pass through the printer, as described in the setup steps. If you want a digital connection such as ISDN, DSL, or ADSL, a third-party device (such as a DSL filter) is required.
You do not need to attach the printer to a computer, but you do need to connect it to a telephone line to send and receive faxes.
You can connect the printer to other equipment. See the following table to determine the best way to set up the printer.
Benefits
Send and receive faxes without using a computer.
Equipment
• The printer
• A telephone cord
• The printer
• A telephone
• Two telephone cords
• The printer
• A telephone
• An answering machine
• Three telephone cords
• The printer
• A telephone
• A computer modem
• Three telephone cords
• Use the fax line as a normal telephone line.
• Send and receive faxes without using a computer.
Receive both incoming voice messages and faxes.
Send faxes using the computer or the printer.
Additional printer setup
59
Using an RJ11 adapter
Country/region
• United Kingdom
• Ireland
• Finland
• Norway
• Denmark
• Italy
• Sweden
• Netherlands
• France
• Portugal
To connect your printer to an answering machine, telephone, or other telecommunications equipment, use the telephone line adapter included in the box with the printer in some countries or regions.
Note: If you have DSL, do not connect the printer using a splitter because the fax feature may not work correctly.
1 Connect the adapter to the telephone cord that came with the printer.
Note: The UK adapter is shown. Your adapter may look different, but it will fit the telephone outlet used in your location.
2 Connect the telephone line of your chosen telecommunications equipment to the left outlet of the adapter.
If your telecommunications equipment uses a US-style (RJ11) telephone line, follow these steps to connect the equipment:
1 Remove the plug from the EXT port on the back of the printer.
Note: Once this plug is removed, any country- or region-specific equipment you connect to the printer by way of the adapter, as shown, will not function properly.
Additional printer setup
60
2 Connect your telecommunications equipment directly to the EXT port on the back of the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or receiving a fax.
Country/region
• Saudi Arabia
• United Arab Emirates
• Egypt
• Bulgaria
• Czech Republic
• Belgium
• Australia
• South Africa
• Greece
Additional printer setup
61
• Israel
• Hungary
• Poland
• Romania
• Russia
• Slovenia
• Spain
• Turkey
To connect a telephone, an answering machine, or other telecommunications equipment to the printer:
1 Remove the plug from the back of the printer.
2 Connect your telecommunications equipment directly to the EXT port on the back of the printer.
Note: Once this plug is removed, any country- or region-specific equipment that you connect to the printer by way of the adapter, as shown, will not function properly.
Country/region
• Germany
• Austria
• Switzerland
Additional printer setup
62
There is a plug installed in the EXT port of the printer. This plug is necessary for the proper functioning of the printer.
Note: Do not remove the plug. If you remove it, other telecommunications devices in your home (such as telephones or answering machines) may not work.
Connecting directly to a telephone wall jack in Germany
Connect the printer directly to a telephone wall jack to send and receive faxes without using a computer.
Note: In Germany (and some other countries), the printer ships with a special RJ-11 plug in the EXT port. Do not remove the RJ-11 plug. It is required for both the fax and telephone to work properly.
1 Make sure you have a telephone cord (provided with the product) and a telephone wall jack.
2 Connect one end of the telephone cord into the LINE port of the printer.
3 Connect the other end of the telephone cord into the N slot of an active telephone wall jack.
Additional printer setup
63
4 If you would like to use the same line for both fax and telephone communication, connect a second telephone line (not provided) between the telephone and the F slot of an active telephone wall jack.
5 If you would like to use the same line for recording messages on your answering machine, connect a second telephone line (not provided) between the answering machine and the other N slot of the telephone wall jack.
Connecting to a telephone
Connect a telephone to the printer to use the fax line as a normal telephone line. Then set up the printer wherever your telephone is located to make copies or to send and receive faxes without using a computer.
Note: Setup steps may vary depending on your country or region.
1 Make sure you have the following:
• A telephone
• Two telephone cords
• A telephone wall jack
Additional printer setup
64
2 Connect one telephone cord to the LINE port of the printer, and then plug it into an active telephone wall jack.
3 Remove the protective plug from the EXT port of the printer.
4 Connect the other telephone cord to a telephone, and then plug it into the EXT port of the printer.
Connecting to an answering machine
Connect an answering machine to the printer to receive both incoming voice messages and faxes.
Note: Setup steps may vary depending on your country or region.
1 Make sure you have the following:
• A telephone
• An answering machine
• Three telephone cords
• A telephone wall jack
Additional printer setup
65
2 Connect one telephone cord into the LINE port of the printer, and then plug it into an active telephone wall jack.
3 Remove the protective plug from the EXT port of the printer.
4 Connect a second telephone cord from the telephone to the answering machine.
5 Connect a third telephone cord from the answering machine to the EXT port of the printer.
Additional printer setup
66
Connecting to a computer with a modem
Connect the printer to a computer with a modem to send faxes from the software program.
Note: Setup steps may vary depending on your country or region.
1 Make sure you have the following:
• A telephone
• A computer with a modem
• Three telephone cords
• A telephone wall jack
2 Connect a telephone cord into the LINE port of the printer, and then plug it into an active telephone wall jack.
3 Remove the protective plug from the EXT port of the printer.
4 Connect a second telephone cord from the telephone to the computer modem.
Additional printer setup
67
5 Connect a third telephone cord from the computer modem to the EXT port of the printer.
Setting the outgoing fax name and number
To have the designated fax name and fax number printed on outgoing faxes:
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Fax Settings.
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.
5 Click inside the Station Name box, and then enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
6 Click inside the Station Number box, and then enter the printer fax number.
7 Click Submit.
Setting the date and time
You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send. If there is a power failure, then you may have to reset the date and time. To set the date and time:
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Links & Index.
3 Click Set Date and Time.
4 Click inside the Manually Set Date & Time box, and then enter the current date and time.
5 Click Submit.
Additional printer setup
68
Turning Daylight Saving Time on
The printer can be set to automatically adjust for Daylight Saving Time (DST):
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Links & Index.
3 Click Set Date and Time.
4 Select Automatically Observe DST.
5 Click Submit.
Additional printer setup
69
Loading paper and specialty media
This section explains how to load the 250-, 500-, and 2000-sheet trays, and the multipurpose feeder. It also includes information about paper orientation, setting the Paper Size and Paper Type, and linking and unlinking trays.
Setting the Paper Size and Paper Type
The Paper Size setting is determined by the position of the paper guides in the tray for all trays except the multipurpose feeder. The Paper Size setting for the multipurpose feeder must be set manually. The factory default Paper Type setting is Plain Paper. The Paper Type setting must be set manually for all trays that do not contain plain paper.
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch .
3 Touch Paper Menu.
4 Touch Paper Size/Type.
5 Touch the arrows for the desired tray until the correct size or type setting appears.
6 Touch Submit.
7 Touch to return to the home screen.
Configuring Universal paper settings
The Universal Paper Size is a user-defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus. Set the Paper Size for the specified tray to Universal when the size you want is not available from the Paper
Size menu. Then, specify all of the following Universal size settings for your paper:
• Units of measure (millimeters or inches)
• Portrait Width
• Portrait Height
Note: The smallest supported Universal size is 76 x 76 mm (3 x 3 in.); the largest size is 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
Specify a unit of measurement
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch .
3 Touch Paper Menu.
4 Touch the down arrow until Universal Setup appears, and then touch Universal Setup.
5 Touch the left or right arrow to select the desired unit of measure.
6 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height.
7 Touch the arrows to select the desired width or height.
Loading paper and specialty media
70
8 Touch Submit to save your selection.
Submitting Selection appears, followed by the Paper menu.
9 Touch to return to the home screen.
Loading the standard or optional 250-sheet or
550-sheet tray
Although the 250-sheet tray and the 550-sheet tray are different in appearance, they require the same process for loading paper. Use these instructions to load paper in either tray:
1 Pull the tray out.
Note: Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display. Doing so may cause a jam.
2 Squeeze the width guide tab inward as shown, and move the width guide to the correct position for the paper size being loaded.
Loading paper and specialty media
71
3 Unlock the length guide, squeeze the length guide tab inward as shown, and slide the guide to the correct position for the paper size being loaded.
Notes:
• Use the size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.
• For standard paper sizes, lock the length guide.
4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
5 Load the paper stack:
• Print side facedown for single-sided printing
• Print side faceup for duplex printing
Note: Paper must be loaded differently in the trays if an optional StapleSmart TM II Finisher is installed.
Loading paper and specialty media
72
Without an optional StapleSmart II Finisher With an optional StapleSmart II Finisher
Single-sided printing Single-sided printing
Duplex (two-sided) printing Duplex (two-sided) printing
Note: Notice the maximum fill line on the side of the tray which indicates the maximum height for loading paper.
Do not overload the tray.
6 If necessary, adjust the paper guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack, and lock the length guide for the paper sizes indicated on the tray.
Loading paper and specialty media
73
7 Insert the tray.
8 If a different type of paper was loaded than the type previously loaded in the tray, then change the Paper Type setting for the tray from the printer control panel.
Loading the 2000-sheet tray
1 Pull the tray out.
2 Pull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size being loaded.
Loading paper and specialty media
74
3 Unlock the length guide.
4 Push the length guide release latch to raise the length guide, slide the guide to the correct position for the paper size being loaded, and then lock the guide.
Loading paper and specialty media
75
5 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
6 Load the paper stack:
• Print side facedown for single-sided printing
• Print side faceup for duplex printing
Note: Paper must be loaded differently in the trays if an optional StapleSmart II Finisher is installed.
Without an optional StapleSmart II Finisher With an optional StapleSmart II Finisher
Single-sided printing Single-sided printing
Loading paper and specialty media
76
Without an optional StapleSmart II Finisher With an optional StapleSmart II Finisher
Duplex (two-sided) printing Duplex (two-sided) printing
Note: Notice the maximum fill line on the side of the tray which indicates the maximum height for loading paper.
Do not overload the tray.
7 Insert the tray.
Loading paper and specialty media
77
Loading the multipurpose feeder
1 Pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
2 Pull out the extension until it is fully extended.
3 Slide the width guide to the far right.
4 Flex the sheets of paper or specialty media back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Paper
* Avoid touching the print side of transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.
Loading paper and specialty media
78
Envelopes
Transparencies*
* Avoid touching the print side of transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.
5 Load the paper or specialty media. Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop.
Without an optional StapleSmart Finisher With an optional StapleSmart Finisher
Single-sided printing Single-sided printing
Duplex (two-sided) printing Duplex (two-sided) printing
Loading paper and specialty media
79
Notes:
• Do not exceed the maximum stack height by forcing paper under the stack height limiter.
• Do not load or close a tray while a job is printing.
• Load only one size and type of media at a time.
• Load envelopes with the flap side up.
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or self-stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
6 Adjust the width guide to lightly touch the edge of the paper stack. Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder, lies flat, and is not bent or wrinkled.
7 From the printer control panel, set the Paper Size and Paper Type.
Loading the envelope feeder
1 Adjust the envelope support for the length of envelope you are loading:
• Short envelopes—Fully close the envelope support.
• Medium-length envelopes—Extend the envelope support to the middle position.
• Long envelopes—Fully open the envelope support.
2 Lift the envelope weight back toward the printer.
3 Slide the width guide to the right.
Loading paper and specialty media
80
4 Prepare the envelopes for loading.
Flex the envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
5 Load the stack of envelopes flap side down.
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or self-stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
Note: Do not exceed the maximum stack height by forcing paper under the stack height limiter.
6 Adjust the width guide to lightly touch the edge of the paper stack.
7 Lower the envelope weight to touch the paper stack.
8 From the printer control panel, set the Paper Size and Paper Type.
Linking and unlinking trays
Linking trays
Tray linking is useful for large print jobs or multiple copies. When one linked tray is empty, paper feeds from the next linked tray. When the Paper Size and Paper Type settings are the same for any trays, the trays are automatically linked.
The printer automatically senses the Paper Size setting according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the multipurpose feeder. The printer can sense A4, A5, JIS B5, Letter, Legal, Executive, and Universal paper sizes. The multipurpose feeder and trays using other paper sizes can be linked manually using the Paper Size menu available from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Note: To link the multipurpose feeder, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in the Paper menu in order for MP Feeder
Size to appear as a menu item.
The Paper Type setting must be set for all trays from the Paper Type menu available from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Loading paper and specialty media
81
Unlinking trays
Unlinked trays have settings that are not the same as the settings of any other tray.
To unlink a tray, change the following tray settings so that they do not match the settings of any other tray:
• Paper Type (for example: Plain Paper, Letterhead, Custom Type <x>)
Paper Type names describe the paper characteristics. If the name that best describes your paper is used by linked trays, assign a different Paper Type name to the tray, such as Custom Type <x>, or define your own custom name.
• Paper Size (for example: letter, A4, statement)
Load a different paper size to change the Paper Size setting for a tray automatically. Paper Size settings for the multipurpose feeder are not automatic; they must be set manually from the Paper Size menu.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not assign a Paper Type name that does not accurately describe the type of paper loaded in the tray. The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified Paper Type. Paper may not be properly processed if an inaccurate Paper Type is selected.
Assigning a custom paper type name
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking the tray.
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 From the home screen, touch .
3 Touch Paper Menu.
4 Touch Paper Size/Type.
5 Touch the paper type arrows for the desired tray until the correct custom type appears.
6 Touch the tray number or MP Feeder Type.
7 Touch Submit.
Changing a Custom Type <x> name
You can use the Embedded Web Server or MarkVision name instead of Custom Type <x>.
TM to define a name other than Custom Type <x> for each of the custom paper types that are loaded. When a Custom Type <x> name is changed, the menus display the new
To change a Custom Type <x> name from the Embedded Web Server:
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Under Default Settings, click Paper Menu.
4 Click Custom Names.
5 Type a name for the paper type in a Custom Name <x> box.
Note: This custom name will replace a custom type <x> name under the Custom Types and Paper Size/Type menus.
Loading paper and specialty media
82
6 Click Submit.
7 Click Custom Types.
Custom Types appears, followed by your custom name.
8 Select a Paper Type setting from the list next to your custom name.
9 Click Submit.
Loading paper and specialty media
83
Paper and specialty media guidelines
Paper guidelines
Selecting the correct paper or specialty media reduces printing problems. For the best print quality, try a sample of the paper or specialty media before buying large quantities.
Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when evaluating new paper stock.
Weight
The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60–176 g/m 2 (16–47 lb bond) grain long. Paper lighter than
60 g/m 2 (16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use 75 g/m 2 (20 lb bond) grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.), we recommend 90 g/m 2 paper.
(24 lb) or heavier
Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid, cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding problems.
Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, then toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is too smooth, then it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points; smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.
Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance.
Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to
48 hours before printing. Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.
Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long , running the length of the paper, or grain short , running the width of the paper.
For 60–176 g/m 2 (16–47 lb bond) paper, grain long paper is recommended. For paper heavier than 176 g/m 2 , grain short is recommended.
Paper and specialty media guidelines
84
Fiber content
Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.
Unacceptable paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:
• Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers, carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
• Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
• Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
• Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ±2.3 mm
(±0.9 in.), such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms.
• Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
• Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers
• Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)
• Paper weighing less than 60 g/m 2 (16 lb)
• Multiple-part forms or documents
Selecting paper
Using appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble-free printing.
To help avoid jams and poor print quality:
• Always use new, undamaged paper.
• Before loading paper, know the recommended print side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on the paper package.
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same source; mixing results in jams.
• Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:
• Use grain long for 60 to 90 g/m 2 weight paper.
• Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
• Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
Paper and specialty media guidelines
85
Use papers printed with heat-resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must be able to withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions. Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation-set or oil-based generally meet these requirements; latex inks might not.
When in doubt, contact the paper supplier.
Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions.
Using recycled paper and other office papers
Recycled office paper produced specifically for use in laser (electrophotographic) printers may be used in your printer.
However, no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well.
Generally, the following property guidelines apply to recycled paper.
• Low moisture content (4–5%)
• Suitable smoothness (100–200 Sheffield units, or 140–350 Bendtsen units, European)
Note: Some much smoother papers (such as premium 24 lb laser papers, 50–90 Sheffield units) and much rougher papers (such as premium cotton papers, 200–300 Sheffield units) have been engineered to work very well in laser printers, despite surface texture. Before using these types of paper, consult your paper supplier.
• Suitable sheet-to-sheet coefficient of friction (0.4–0.6)
• Sufficient bending resistance in the direction of feed
Recycled paper, paper of lower weight (<60 g/m 2 [16 lb bond]) and/or lower caliper (<3.8 mils [0.1 mm]), and paper that is cut grain-short for portrait (or short-edge) fed printers may have lower bending resistance than is required for reliable paper feeding. Before using these types of paper for laser (electrophotographic) printing, consult your paper supplier. Remember that these are general guidelines only and that paper meeting these guidelines may still cause paper feeding problems in any laser printer (for example, if the paper curls excessively under normal printing conditions).
Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:
• For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40%. Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 to 24°C (65 to 75°F) with relative humidity between 40 and 60%.
• Store paper in cartons when possible, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
• Store individual packages on a flat surface.
• Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
Paper and specialty media guidelines
86
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights
The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper sources and the types of paper they support.
Note: For an unlisted paper size, configure a Universal Paper Size.
Paper sizes supported by the printer
Paper size Dimensions 250- or
550-sheet trays
(standard or optional)
Optional
2000-sheet tray
Multipurpose feeder
Duplex unit
A4
A5
A6 1,2
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio 1
210 x 297 mm
(8.3 x 11.7 in.)
148 x 210 mm
(5.8 x 8.3 in.)
105 x 148 mm
(4.1 x 5.8 in.)
182 x 257 mm
(7.2 x 10.1 in.)
216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 in.)
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
184 x 267 mm
(7.3 x 10.5 in.)
216 x 340 mm
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Folio 1
Statement 1
216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)
140 x 216 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)
X
X X
1 This size appears in the Paper Size menu only when the paper source does not support size sensing or when size sensing is turned off.
2 Only the standard exit bin supports this size.
3 This size setting formats the page for 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is specified by the software application.
4 To support duplexing, the Universal width must be between 148 mm (5.8 in) and 216 mm (8.5 in); Universal length must be between 182 mm (7.2 in) and 356 mm (14 in).
Paper and specialty media guidelines
87
Paper size Dimensions 250- or
550-sheet trays
(standard or optional)
Optional
2000-sheet tray
X
Multipurpose feeder
Duplex unit
Universal 3,4 138 x 210 mm
(5.5 x 8.3 in.) up to
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
70 x 127 mm
(2.8 x 5 in.) up to
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
X X
X
X
7 3/4 Envelope
(Monarch)
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
Other Envelope
148 x 182 mm
(5.8 x 7.7 in.) up to
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
98 x 191 mm
(3.9 x 7.5 in.)
98 x 225 mm
(3.9 x 8.9 in.)
105 x 241 mm
(4.1 x 9.5 in.)
110 x 220 mm
(4.3 x 8.7 in.)
98 x 162 mm
(3.9 x 6.4 in.) to
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1 This size appears in the Paper Size menu only when the paper source does not support size sensing or when size sensing is turned off.
2 Only the standard exit bin supports this size.
3 This size setting formats the page for 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is specified by the software application.
4 To support duplexing, the Universal width must be between 148 mm (5.8 in) and 216 mm (8.5 in); Universal length must be between 182 mm (7.2 in) and 356 mm (14 in).
Note: An optional 250-sheet Universally Adjustable Tray is available for sizes smaller than A5, such as index cards.
Paper and specialty media guidelines
88
Paper types and weights supported by the printer
The printer engine supports 60–176 g/m 2 (16–47 lb) paper weights. The duplex unit supports 63–170 g/m 2 (17–45 lb) paper weights.
Paper type 250- or 550-sheet trays (standard or optional)
Optional
2000-sheet tray
Multipurpose feeder Duplex unit
Paper
• Plain
• Bond
• Colored
• Custom
• Letterhead
• Light
• Heavy
• Preprinted
• Rough/Cotton
• Recycled
Card stock
Envelopes X X X
Labels 1
Transparencies
1 Single-sided paper labels designed for laser printers are supported for occasional use: no more than 20 pages of labels a month. Vinyl, pharmacy, and dual-web labels are not supported.
Warning—Potential Damage: Printing more than 20 pages of paper labels a month may damage the duplex unit.
Paper types and weights supported by the output bins
Use this table to determine the possible output destinations of print jobs which use supported paper types and weights. The paper capacity of each output bin is listed in parentheses. Paper capacity estimations are calculated based on 75 g/m 2 (20 lb) paper.
Paper and specialty media guidelines
89
The finisher supports 60–176 g/m 2 (16–47 lb) paper weights.
Paper type Standard exit bin
(350 or 550 sheets)
Output Expander
(550 sheets) or High
Capacity Output
Stacker (1850 sheets)
Optional hardware
4-Bin Mailbox
(400 sheets) 1
StapleSmart II
Finisher
(500 sheets) 2
Paper
• Plain
• Bond
• Colored
• Custom
• Letterhead
• Light
• Heavy
• Preprinted
• Rough/Cotton
• Recycled
Card stock
Envelopes
Labels
Transparencies
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1 Supports 60-90 g/m 2 (16-24 lb) paper weights.
2 Maximum of 50 sheets of 75 g/m 2 (20 lb) paper per stapled packet. Results may vary with heavier paper.
Paper and specialty media guidelines
90
Copying
ADF Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
Making copies
Making a quick copy
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, press .
4 If you placed the document on the scanner glass, then touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen.
Copying using the ADF
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 Adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy, or use the keypad to enter the number of copies.
The copy screen appears.
Copying
91
4 Change the copy settings as needed.
5 Touch Copy It.
Copying using the scanner glass
1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 On the home screen, touch Copy, or use the keypad to enter the number of copies.
The copy screen appears.
3 Change the copy settings as needed.
4 Touch Copy It.
5 If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the
Next Page.
6 Touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen.
Copying photos
1 Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 On the home screen, touch Copy.
3 Touch Options.
4 Touch Content.
5 Touch Photograph.
6 Touch Done.
7 Touch Copy It.
8 Touch Scan the Next Page or Finish the Job.
Copying on specialty media
Making transparencies
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Copy from, and then identify the size of the original document.
5 Touch Copy to, and then touch the tray that contains transparencies, or touch Manual Feeder and then place transparencies in the multipurpose feeder.
Copying
92
6 Touch the desired size of the transparencies, and then touch Continue.
7 Touch the arrows until Transparency appears.
8 Touch Transparency, and then touch Continue.
9 Touch Copy It.
Copying to letterhead
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Copy from, and then identify the size of the original document.
5 Touch Copy to, and then touch Manual Feeder and place letterhead face up, top edge first in the multipurpose feeder.
6 Touch the desired size of the letterhead, and then touch Continue.
7 Touch the arrows until Letterhead appears.
8 Touch Letterhead, and then touch Continue.
9 Touch Copy It.
Customizing copy settings
Copying from one size to another
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Copy from, and then identify the size of the original document.
5 Touch Copy to, and then select the size you want the copy to be.
Note: If you select a paper size that is different from the “Copy from” size, then the printer will scale the size automatically.
6 Touch Copy It.
Copying
93
Making copies using paper from a selected tray
During the copy process, you can select the tray that contains the paper type of choice. For example, if specialty media is located in the multipurpose feeder, and you want to make copies on that media:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Copy from, and then identify the size of the original document.
5 Touch Copy to, and then touch Manual Feeder or the tray that contains the paper type you want.
Note: If you choose Manual Feeder, then you will need to also select the paper size and type.
6 Touch Copy It.
Copying a document that contains mixed paper sizes
Use the ADF to copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the “Copy to” and “Copy from” settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled to fit a single paper size (Example 2).
Example 1: Copying to mixed paper sizes
The printer has two paper trays, one tray loaded with letter-size paper and the other with legal-size paper. A document that contains letter- and legal-size pages needs to be copied.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Copy from, and then touch Auto Size Sense.
5 Touch Copy to, and then touch Auto Size Match.
6 Touch Copy It.
The scanner identifies the mixed paper sizes as they scan. Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document.
Copying
94
Example 2: Copying to a single paper size
The printer has one paper tray, loaded with letter-size paper. A document that contains letter- and legal-size pages needs to be copied.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Copy from, and then touch Mixed Letter/Legal.
5 Touch Copy to, and then touch Letter.
6 Touch Copy It.
The scanner identifies the mixed paper sizes as they scan and then scales the legal-size pages to print on letter-size paper.
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 From the Sides (Duplex) area, touch the button that looks the way you want your copies duplexed.
The first number represents sides of the original documents; the second number represents sides of the copy.
For example, select 1-sided to 2-sided if you have 1-sided original documents and you want 2-sided copies.
5 Touch Copy It.
Reducing or enlarging copies
Copies can be reduced to 25% of the original document size or enlarged to 400% of the original document size. The factory default setting for Scale is Auto. If you leave Scale set to Auto, the content of your original document will be scaled to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.
To reduce or enlarge a copy:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
Copying
95
4 From the Scale area, touch the arrows to enlarge or reduce your copies.
Touching “Copy to” or “Copy from” after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.
5 Touch Copy It.
Adjusting copy quality
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Options.
5 Touch Content.
6 Touch the button that best represents what you are copying:
• Text—Used for original documents that are mostly text or line art
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures
• Photograph—Used when the original document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet print
• Printed Image—Used when copying halftone photographs, graphics such as documents printed on a laser printer, or pages from a magazine or newspaper that are composed primarily of images
7 Touch Done.
8 Touch Copy It.
Collating copies
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print each copy as a set (collated) or to print the copies as groups of pages (not collated).
Collated Not collated
By default, Collate is set to On. If you do not want to collate your copies, then change the setting to Off.
To turn collation off:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Use the keypad to enter the number of copies.
Copying
96
5 Touch Off if you do not want your copies collated.
6 Touch Copy It.
Placing separator sheets between copies
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Options.
5 Touch Separator Sheets.
Note: Collate must be On for the separator sheets to be placed between copies. If Collate is Off, the separator sheets are added to the end of the print job.
6 Select one of the following:
• Between Copies
• Between Jobs
• Between Pages
7 Touch Done.
8 Touch Copy It.
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet
In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple-page document onto a single sheet of paper.
Notes:
• The Paper Size must be set to Letter, Legal, A4, or B5 JIS.
• The Copy Size must be set to 100%.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Select a duplex setting.
5 Touch Options.
6 Touch Paper Saver.
7 Select the desired output.
Copying
97
8 Touch Print Page Borders if you want a box drawn around each page of the copies.
9 Touch Done.
10 Touch Copy It.
Creating a custom job (job build)
The custom job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job. Each set may be scanned using different job parameters. When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled, the scanner scans the first set of original documents using the supplied parameters, and then it scans the next set with the same or different parameters.
The definition of a set depends on the scan source:
• If you scan a document on the scanner glass, a set consists of one page.
• If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF becomes empty.
• If you scan one page using the ADF, a set consists of one page.
For example:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Options.
5 Touch Custom Job.
6 Touch On.
7 Touch Done.
8 Touch Copy It.
When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.
9 Load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass, and then touch
Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed.
Note: If required, change the job settings.
10 If you have another document to scan, load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed. Otherwise, touch Finish the job.
Copying
98
Job interrupt
Job interrupt pauses the current print job and lets you print copies.
Note: The Job Interrupt setting must be On for this feature to function.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, press .
4 If you placed the document on the scanner glass, then touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen.
Placing information on copies
Placing the date and time at the top of each page
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Options.
5 Touch Header/Footer.
6 Pick an area of the page to place the date and time.
7 Touch Date/Time, and then touch Continue.
8 Touch Done.
9 Touch Copy It.
Placing an overlay message on each page
An overlay message can be placed on each page. The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, or Draft. To place a message on the copies:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Options.
Copying
99
5 Touch Overlay.
6 Touch the button containing the overlay you want to use.
7 Touch Done.
8 Touch Copy It.
Canceling a copy job
Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF
When the ADF begins processing a document, the scanning screen appears. To cancel the copy job, touch Cancel
Job on the touch screen.
A “Canceling scan job” screen appears. The ADF clears all pages in the ADF and cancels the job.
Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass
Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen.
A “Canceling scan job” screen appears. Once the job is canceled, the copy screen appears.
Canceling a copy job while the pages are being printed
1 Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen, or press on the keypad.
2 Touch the job you want to cancel.
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
The remaining print job is canceled. The home screen appears.
Understanding the copy screens and options
Copy from
This option opens a screen where you can enter the size of the documents you are going to copy.
• Touch a paper size button to select it as the “Copy from” setting. The copy screen appears with your new setting displayed.
• When “Copy from” is set to Mixed Letter/Legal, you can copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes.
• When “Copy from” is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document.
Copying
100
Copy to
This option opens a screen where you can enter the size and type of paper on which your copies will be printed.
• Touch a paper size button to select it as the “Copy to” setting. The copy screen appears with your new setting displayed.
• If the size settings for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are different, the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting to accommodate the difference.
• If the type or size of paper that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays, touch Manual Feeder, and manually send the paper through the multipurpose feeder.
• When “Copy to” is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the size of the original document. If a matching paper size is not in one of the trays, the printer scales each copy to fit loaded paper.
Scale
This option creates an image from your copy that is proportionally scaled anywhere between 25% and 400%. Scale can also be set for you automatically.
• When you want to copy from one size of paper to another, such as from legal-size to letter-size paper, setting the
“Copy from” and “Copy to” paper sizes automatically changes the scale to keep all the original document information on your copy.
• Touch the left arrow to decrease the value by 1%; touch the right arrow to increase the value by 1%.
• Hold your finger on an arrow to make a continuous increment change.
• Hold your finger on an arrow for two seconds to cause the pace of the change to accelerate.
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your copies will turn out in relation to the original document.
Content
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, Photograph, or Printed Image.
• Text—Emphasize sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures
• Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document.
• Printed Image—Used when copying halftone photographs, graphics such as documents printed on a laser printer, or pages from a magazine or newspaper that are composed primarily of images
Sides (Duplex)
Use this option to select duplex settings. You can print copies on one or two sides, make two-sided copies (duplex) of two-sided original documents, make two-sided copies from one-sided original documents, or make one-sided copies (simplex) from two-sided original documents.
Copying
101
Collate
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document. The factory default setting for Collate is on; the output pages of your copies will be ordered (1,2,3) (1,2,3) (1,2,3). If you want all the copies of each page to remain together, turn Collate off, and your copies will be ordered (1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(3,3,3).
Options
Touching the Options button opens a screen where you can change Paper Saver, Advanced Imaging, Custom Job,
Separator Sheets, Margin Shift, Edge Erase, Header/Footer, Overlay, Content, Advanced Duplex, and Save as Shortcut settings.
Paper Saver
This option lets you print two or more sheets of an original document together on the same page. Paper Saver is also called N-up printing. The N stands for Number. For example, 2-up would print two pages of your document on a single page, and 4-up would print four pages of your document on a single page. Touching Print Page Borders adds or removes the outline border surrounding the original document pages on the output page.
Advanced Imaging
This option lets you adjust Background Removal, Contrast, Shadow Detail, Scan Edge to Edge, Color Balance, and mirror image before you copy the document.
Custom Job
This option combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
Separator Sheets
This option places a blank piece of paper between copies, pages, and print jobs. The separator sheets can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are printed on.
Margin Shift
This option increases the size of the margin a specified distance. This can be useful in providing space to bind or holepunch copies. Use the increase or decrease arrows to set how much of a margin you want. If the additional margin is too large, then the copy will be cropped.
Edge Erase
This option eliminates smudges or information around the edges of your document. You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is within the selected area, leaving nothing printed on that portion of the paper.
Header/Footer
This option turns on the Date/Time, Page number, Bates number, or Custom text and prints them in the specified header or footer location.
Copying
102
Overlay
This option creates a watermark (or message) that overlays the content of your copy. You can choose between Urgent,
Confidential, Copy, and Draft, or you can enter a custom message in the ”Enter custom text” field. The word you pick will appear, faintly, in large print across each page.
Note: A custom overlay can also be created by your system support person. When a custom overlay is created, a button with an icon of that overlay will be available.
Content
This option enhances copy quality. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, Photograph, or Printed Image.
• Text—Use this setting when copying original documents that are mostly text or line art.
• Text/Photo—Use this setting when copying original documents that are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures.
• Photograph—Use this setting when copying an original document that is a high-quality photograph or inkjet print.
• Printed Image—Use this setting when copying halftone photographs, documents printed on a laser printer, or pages from a magazine or newspaper.
Advanced Duplex
This option controls whether the documents are one-sided or two-sided, what orientation your original documents have, and how your documents are bound.
Note: Some Advanced Duplex options may not be available on all printer models.
Save as Shortcut
This option allows the current settings to be saved as a shortcut.
Improving copy quality
Question
When should I use Text mode?
Tip
• Use text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the copy, and preserving images copied from the original document is not a concern.
• Text mode is recommended for receipts, carbon copy forms, and documents that contain only text or fine line art.
When should I use Text/Photo mode?
• Use Text/Photo mode when copying an original document that contains a mixture of text and graphics.
• Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business graphics, and brochures.
When should I use Printed Image mode? Use Printed Image mode when copying halftone photographs, graphics such as documents printed on a laser printer, or pages from a magazine or newspaper
When should I use Photograph mode?
Use Photograph mode when the original document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet print.
Copying
103
E-mailing
ADF Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
You can use the printer to e-mail scanned documents to one or more recipients. There are three ways to send an e-mail from the printer. You can type the e-mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book.
Getting ready to e-mail
Setting up the e-mail function
For e-mail to operate, it must be turned on in the printer configuration and have a valid IP address or gateway address.
To set up the e-mail function:
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Under Default Settings, click E-mail/FTP Settings.
4 Click E-mail Settings.
5 Click Setup E-mail Server.
6 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.
7 Click Add.
E-mailing
104
Configuring the e-mail settings
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click E-mail/FTP Settings.
4 Click E-mail Settings.
5 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.
6 Click Submit.
Creating an e-mail shortcut
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts.
4 Click E-mail Shortcut Setup.
5 Type a unique name for the recipient, and then enter the e-mail address.
Note: If you are entering multiple addresses, then separate each address with a comma (,).
6 Select the scan settings (Format, Content, Color, and Resolution).
7 Enter a shortcut number, and then click Add.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the touch screen
1 On the home screen, touch E-mail.
2 Type the recipient's e-mail address.
To create a group of recipients, touch Next address, and then type the next recipient’s e-mail address.
3 Touch Save as Shortcut.
4 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Enter.
5 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
E-mailing
105
E-mailing a document
Sending an e-mail using the touch screen
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch E-mail.
4 Enter the e-mail address or shortcut number.
To enter additional recipients, touch Next Address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add.
5 Touch E-mail It.
Sending an e-mail using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press , and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
To enter additional recipients, press Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add.
4 Touch E-mail It.
Sending an e-mail using the address book
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch E-mail.
4 Touch Search Address Book.
5 Enter the name or part of the name you are searching for, and then touch Search.
6 Touch the name that you want to add to the To: box.
To enter additional recipients, press Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add; or search the address book.
7 Touch E-mail It.
E-mailing
106
Customizing e-mail settings
Adding e-mail subject and message information
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch E-mail.
4 Type an e-mail address.
5 Touch Options.
6 Touch Subject.
7 Type the e-mail subject.
8 Touch Done.
9 Touch Message.
10 Type an e-mail message.
11 Touch Done.
12 Touch E-mail It.
Changing the output file type
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch E-mail.
4 Type an e-mail address.
5 Touch Options.
6 Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send.
• PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www.adobe.com.
• Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access
• TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the
Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent
JPEG.
E-mailing
107
• JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs
• XPS—Creates a single XML Paper Specification (XPS) file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet
Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer
7 Touch E-mail It.
Note: If you selected Encrypted PDF, then enter your password twice.
Canceling an e-mail
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning… appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning… appears or while Scan the Next
Page / Finish the Job appears.
Understanding e-mail options
Original Size
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to e-mail.
• Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The e-mail screen appears with your new setting displayed.
• When “Original Size” is set to Mixed Letter/Legal, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes.
• When “Original Size” is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document.
Sides (Duplex)
This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.
Orientation
This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes the Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation.
Binding
Tells the printer whether the original document is bound on the long-edge or short-edge side.
E-mail Subject
This option lets you enter a subject line for your e-mail. You can enter up to 255 characters.
E-mailing
108
E-mail File Name
This option lets you customize the attachment file name.
E-mail Message
This option lets you enter a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.
Resolution
Adjusts the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-mail file size and the time needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the e-mail file size.
Send As
This option sets the output (PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS) for the scanned image.
• PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by
Adobe at www.adobe.com.
• Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access
• TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs
• XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer
Content
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photo. Color can be turned on or off with any of the Content choices. Content affects the quality and size of your e-mail.
• Text—Emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures
• Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This increases the amount of information saved.
• Color—Sets the scan type and output for the e-mail. Color documents can be scanned and sent to an e-mail address.
Advanced Options
Touching this button opens a screen where you change Advanced Imaging, Custom Job, Transmission Log, Scan
Preview, Edge Erase, and Darkness settings.
• Advanced Imaging—Adjusts Background Removal, Contrast, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Mirror
Image before you copy the document
• Custom Job (Job Build)—Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job
• Transmission Log—Prints the transmission log or transmission error log
E-mailing
109
• Scan Preview—Displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
• Edge Erase—Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Darkness—Adjusts how light or dark your scanned e-mails will turn out
E-mailing
110
Faxing
Note: Fax capabilities may not be available on all printer models.
ADF Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
Sending a fax
Sending a fax using the printer control panel
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.
4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut using the touch screen or keypad.
To add recipients, touch Next Number, and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut number, or search the address book.
Note: To place a dial pause within a fax number, press . The dial pause appears as a comma in the “Fax to” box.
Use this feature if you need to dial an outside line first.
5 Touch Fax It.
Faxing
111
Sending a fax using the computer
Faxing from a computer lets you send electronic documents without leaving your desk. This gives you the flexibility of faxing documents directly from software programs.
Note: In order to perform this function from your computer, you must use the PostScript printer driver for your printer.
1 From your software program, click File ª Print.
2 From the Print window, select your printer, and then click Properties.
3 Choose the Other Options tab, and then click Fax.
4 Click OK, and then click OK again.
5 On the Fax screen, type the name and number of the fax recipient.
6 Click Send.
Creating shortcuts
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web
Server
Instead of entering the entire phone number of a fax recipient on the printer control panel each time you want to send a fax, you can create a permanent fax destination and assign a shortcut number. A shortcut can be created to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers.
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Manage Shortcuts.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support person.
4 Click Fax Shortcut Setup.
5 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.
To create a multiple-number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.
Note: Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).
6 Assign a shortcut number.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
7 Click Add.
Faxing
112
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.
4 Enter the fax number.
To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number, and then enter the next fax number.
5 Touch Save as Shortcut.
6 Enter a name for the shortcut.
7 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK. If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
8 Touch Fax It to send the fax, or touch to return to the home screen.
Using shortcuts and the address book
Using fax shortcuts
Fax shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine. You can assign shortcut numbers when creating permanent fax destinations. Permanent fax destinations or speed dial numbers are created in the
Manage Shortcuts link located under Settings on the Embedded Web Server. A shortcut number (1–99999) can contain a single recipient or multiple recipients. By creating a group fax shortcut with a shortcut number, you can quickly and easily fax broadcast information to an entire group.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not place postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press , and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
Using the address book
Note: If the address book feature is not enabled, then contact your system support person.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.
Faxing
113
4 Touch Search Address Book.
5 Using the virtual keyboard, type the name or part of the name of the person whose fax number you want to find.
(Do not attempt to search for multiple names at the same time.)
6 Touch Search.
7 Touch the name to add it to the “Fax to” list.
8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 to enter additional addresses.
9 Touch Fax It.
Customizing fax settings
Changing the fax resolution
Adjusting the resolution setting changes the quality of the fax. Settings range from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra
Fine (slowest speed, best quality).
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.
4 Use the keypad to enter the fax number.
5 Touch Options.
6 From the Resolution area, touch the arrows to change to the resolution you want.
7 Touch Fax It.
Making a fax lighter or darker
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.
4 Use the keypad to enter the fax number.
5 Touch Options.
6 From the Darkness area, touch the arrows to adjust the darkness of the fax.
7 Touch Fax It.
Faxing
114
Sending a fax at a scheduled time
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.
4 Enter the fax number using the numbers on the touch screen or keypad.
5 Touch Options.
6 Touch Advanced Options.
7 Touch Delayed Send.
Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, the Delayed Send button will not appear. Faxes waiting for transmission are listed in the Fax Queue.
8 Touch the arrows to adjust the time the fax will be transmitted.
The time is increased or decreased in increments of 30 minutes. If the current time is shown, the left arrow is unavailable.
9 Touch Done.
10 Touch Fax it.
Note: The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time.
Viewing a fax log
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Reports.
4 Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.
Blocking junk faxes
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Fax Settings.
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.
Faxing
115
5 Click the Block No Name Fax option.
This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or no fax station name.
6 In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or fax station names of specific fax callers you want to block.
Canceling an outgoing fax
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning… appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning… appears or while Scan the Next
Page / Finish the Job appears.
Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory
1 On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.
The Cancel Jobs screen appears.
2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.
Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch the job you want to cancel.
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen appears.
Understanding fax options
Original Size
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to fax.
• Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The fax screen appears with your new setting displayed.
• When Original Size is set to Mixed Letter/Legal, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes.
• When “Original Size” is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document.
Faxing
116
Content
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photograph. Color can be turned on or off with any of the Content choices. Content affects the quality and size of your scan.
• Text—Emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures
• Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This increases the amount of information saved.
• Color—Sets the scan type and output for the fax. Color documents can be scanned and sent to a fax destination.
Sides (Duplex)
This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.
Resolution
This options increases how closely the scanner examines the document you want to fax. If you are faxing a photo, a drawing with fine lines, or a document with very small text, increase the Resolution setting. This will increase the amount of time required for the scan and will increase the quality of the fax output.
• Standard—Suitable for most documents
• Fine—Recommended for documents with small print
• Super fine—Recommended for original documents with fine detail
• Ultra fine—Recommended for documents with pictures or photos
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your faxes will turn out in relation to the original document.
Advanced Options
Touching this button opens a screen where you can change Delayed Send, Advanced Imaging, Custom Job,
Transmission Log, Scan Preview, Edge Erase, and Advanced Duplex settings.
• Delayed Send—Lets you send a fax at a later time or date. After setting up your fax, touch Delayed Send, enter the time and date you would like to send your fax, and then touch Done. This setting can be especially useful in sending information to fax lines that are not readily available during certain hours, or when transmission times are cheaper.
Note: If the printer is turned off when the delayed fax is scheduled to be sent, the fax is sent the next time the printer is turned on.
• Advanced Imaging—Adjusts Background Removal, Contrast, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Mirror
Image before you fax the document
• Custom Job (Job Build)—Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job
• Transmission Log—Prints the transmission log or transmission error log
• Scan Preview—Displays the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is scanned, the scanning is paused, and a preview image appears.
Faxing
117
• Edge Erase—Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Advanced Duplex—Controls how many sides and what orientation an original document has, and whether original documents are bound along the long edge or the short edge
Note: Some Advanced Duplex options may not be available on all printer models.
Improving fax quality
Question
When should I use Text mode?
Tip
• Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the fax, and preserving images copied from the original document is not a concern.
• Text mode is recommended for faxing receipts, carbon copy forms, and documents that contain only text or fine line art.
When should I use Text/Photo mode?
When should I use Photo mode?
• Use Text/Photo mode when faxing an original document that contains a mixture of text and graphics.
• Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business graphics, and brochures.
Use Photo mode when faxing photos printed on a laser printer or taken from a magazine or newspaper.
Holding and forwarding faxes
Holding faxes
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually or at a scheduled day or time.
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Fax Settings.
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.
5 Click Holding Faxes.
6 Enter a password in the Print Faxes Password box.
7 From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:
• Off
• Always On
• Manual
• Scheduled
Faxing
118
8 If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps. Otherwise, go to step 9.
a Click Fax Holding Schedule.
b From the Action menu, select Hold faxes.
c From the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.
d From the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.
9 Click Add.
Forwarding a fax
This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e-mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Fax Settings.
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.
5 From the Fax Forwarding menu, select one of the following:
• Print and Forward
• Forward
6 From the “Forward to” menu, select one of the following:
• Fax
• FTP
• LDSS
• eSF
7 Click inside the Forward to Shortcut box, and then enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.
Note: The shortcut number must be a valid shortcut number for the setting that was selected in the “Forward to” menu.
8 Click Submit.
Faxing
119
Scanning to an FTP address
ADF Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. Only one FTP address may be sent to the server at a time.
Once an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person, the name of the destination becomes available as a shortcut number, or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon. An FTP destination could also be another PostScript printer; for example, a color document can be scanned and then sent to a color printer. Sending a document to an FTP server is similar to sending a fax. The difference is that you are sending the information over your network instead of over the phone line.
Scanning to an FTP address
Scanning to an FTP address using the keypad
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch FTP.
4 Type the FTP address.
5 Touch Send It.
Scanning to an FTP address
120
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press #, and then enter the FTP shortcut number.
4 Touch Send It.
Scanning to an FTP address using the address book
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch FTP.
4 Touch Search Address Book.
5 Type the name or part of the name you are searching for, and then touch Search.
6 Touch the name that you want to add to the To: field.
7 Touch Send It.
Creating shortcuts
Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the control panel each time you want to send a document to an
FTP server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number. There are two methods for creating shortcut numbers: using a computer or using the printer touch screen.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support person.
4 Click FTP Shortcut Setup.
5 Enter the appropriate information into the boxes.
Scanning to an FTP address
121
6 Enter a shortcut number.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
7 Click Add.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen
1 On the home screen, touch FTP.
2 Type the address of the FTP site.
3 Touch Save as Shortcut.
4 Enter a name for the shortcut.
5 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK. If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
6 Touch Send It to start the scan, or touch to return to the home screen.
Understanding FTP options
Original Size
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to copy.
• Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The FTP screen appears with your new setting displayed.
• When “Original Size” is set to Mixed Letter/Legal, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes.
• When “Original Size” is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document.
Sides (Duplex)
This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the document.
Orientation
This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes the Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation.
Binding
Tells the printer whether the original document is bound on the long-edge or short-edge side.
Scanning to an FTP address
122
Resolution
This option adjusts the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size.
Send As
This option sets the output (PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS) for the scanned image.
• PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by
Adobe at www.adobe.com.
• Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access
• TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs
• XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer
Content
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photo. Color can be turned on or off with any of the Content choices. Content affects the quality and size of your FTP file.
• Text—Emphasize sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures
• Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This increases the amount of information saved.
• Color—Sets the scan type and output for the FTP file. Color documents can be scanned and sent to an FTP site, computer, e-mail address, or the printer.
Advanced Options
Touching this button opens a screen where you can change Advanced Imaging, Custom Job, Transmission Log, Scan
Preview, Edge Erase, and Darkness settings.
• Advanced Imaging—Adjusts image output settings before you scan the document
– Background Removal—Adjusts the white portion of the output. Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the white portion.
– Color Dropout—Color dropout is used for form Optical Character Recognition (OCR) processing. Selecting a color eliminates the color from a form, enabling improved OCR capabilities.
– Contrast—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the contrast.
– JPEG Quality—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the image compression.
– Mirror Image—Select this box to create a mirror image scan.
– Negative Image—Select this box to create a negative image scan.
– Shadow Detail—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the visible detail in the shadows.
Scanning to an FTP address
123
– Scan edge to edge—Select this box to scan edge to edge.
– Sharpness—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the sharpness.
• Custom Job (Job Build)—Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job
• Transmission Log—Prints the transmission log or transmission error log
• Scan Preview—Displays the first page of an image before it is included in the FTP file. When the first page is scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
• Edge Erase—Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Darkness—Adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out
Improving FTP quality
Question
When should I use Text mode?
Tip
• Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of sending a document to an FTP site, and preserving images copied from the original document is not a concern.
• Text mode is recommended for receipts, carbon copy forms, and documents that only contain text or fine line art.
When should I use Text/Photo mode?
When should I use Photo mode?
• Use Text/Photo mode when sending a document to an FTP site that contains a mixture of text and graphics.
• Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business graphics, and brochures.
Use Photo mode when the original document is composed mostly of photos printed on a laser printer or taken from a magazine or newspaper.
Scanning to an FTP address
124
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
ADF Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive. The computer does not have to be directly connected to the printer for you to receive Scan to PC images. You can scan the document back to the computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer.
Scanning to a computer
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Scan Profile.
3 Click Create.
4 Select your scan settings, and then click Next.
5 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scanned output file.
6 Enter a scan name.
The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.
7 Click Submit.
8 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
125
A shortcut number was automatically assigned when you clicked Submit. You can use this shortcut number when you are ready to scan your documents.
a Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
b If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
c Press , and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, or touch Held Jobs on the home screen, and then touch Profiles.
d After you enter the shortcut number, the scanner scans and sends the document to the directory or program you specified. If you touched Profiles on the home screen, then locate your shortcut on the list.
9 Return to the computer to view the file.
The output file is saved in the location you specified or launched in the program you specified.
Scanning to a flash drive
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer.
The Held Jobs screen appears.
4 Touch Scan to USB drive.
5 Select the scan settings.
6 Touch Scan It.
Understanding scan profile options
Quick Setup
This option lets you select preset formats or customize the scan job settings. You can select one of these settings:
Custom
Text - BW PDF
Text - BW TIFF
Photo - Color JPEG
Photo - Color TIFF
Text/Photo - BW PDF
Text/Photo - Color PDF
To customize the scan job settings, from the Quick Setup menu, select Custom. Then change the scan settings as needed.
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
126
Format Type
This option sets the output (PDF, JPEG, TIFF, SECURE PDF, or XPS) for the scanned image.
• PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by
Adobe at www.adobe.com.
• JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs
• TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access
• XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer
Compression
This option sets the format used to compress the scanned output file.
Default Content
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photo. Content affects the quality and size of your scanned file.
Text—Emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background
Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures
Photo—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This increases the amount of information saved.
Color
This option tells the printer the color of the original documents. You can select Gray, BW (Black and White), or Color.
Original Size
This option sets the size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter- and legal-size pages).
Orientation
This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes the Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation.
Sides (Duplex)
This option informs the printer if your original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the document.
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
127
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document.
Resolution
This option adjusts the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size.
Advanced Imaging
This option lets you adjust Background Removal, Contrast, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Color Dropout before you scan the document. It also lets you Scan edge to edge, as a Mirror Image, or as a Negative Image.
• Background Removal—Adjusts the white portion of the output. Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the white portion.
• Contrast—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the contrast.
• Shadow Detail—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the visible detail in the shadows.
• Sharpness—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the sharpness.
• Color Dropout—Color dropout is used for form Optical Character Recognition (OCR) processing. Selecting a color eliminates the color from a form, enabling improved OCR capabilities.
• Color Dropout Threshold—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the amount of color dropout.
• Scan edge to edge—Select this box to scan edge to edge.
• Mirror Image—Select this box to create a mirror image scan.
• Negative Image—Select this box to create a negative image scan.
Improving scan quality
Question
When should I use Text mode?
Tip
• Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the scan, and preserving images copied from the original document is not a concern.
• Text mode is recommended for receipts, carbon copy forms, and documents that only contain text or fine line art.
When should I use Text/Photo mode?
When should I use Photo mode?
• Use Text/Photo mode when scanning an original document that contains a mixture of text and graphics.
• Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business graphics, and brochures.
Use Photo mode when scanning photos printed on a laser printer or taken from a magazine or newspaper.
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
128
Printing
This chapter covers printing, printer reports, and job cancelation. Selection and handling of paper and specialty
Printing a document
1 Load paper into a tray or feeder.
2 From the printer control panel Paper menu, set the Paper Type and Paper Size to match the loaded paper.
3 Do one of the following:
For Windows users
a With a document open, click File ª Print.
b Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup, and then adjust the settings as needed.
Note: To print on a specific size or type of paper, adjust the paper size or type settings to match the loaded paper, or select the appropriate tray or feeder.
c Click OK, and then click Print.
For Macintosh users
a Customize the settings as needed in the Page Setup dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.
2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the loaded paper.
3 Click OK.
b Customize the settings as needed in the Print dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the Print dialog and pop-up menus, adjust the settings as needed.
Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the loaded paper, or select the appropriate tray or feeder.
3 Click Print.
Printing on specialty media
Tips on using letterhead
• Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers.
• Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Before loading letterhead, fan the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
Printing
129
• Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. For information on how to load letterhead, see:
–
“Loading the standard or optional 250-sheet or 550-sheet tray” on page 71
–
“Loading the 2000-sheet tray” on page 74
–
“Loading the multipurpose feeder” on page 78
Tips on using transparencies
Print samples on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
When printing on transparencies:
• Feed transparencies from a 250-sheet tray, a 550-sheet tray, or the multipurpose feeder.
• Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure transparencies are able to withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting, or releasing hazardous emissions.
• Use transparencies that are 138–146 g/m 2 (37–39 lb. bond) in weight.
• To prevent print quality problems, avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies.
• Before loading transparencies, fan the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
Tips on using envelopes
Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.
When printing on envelopes:
• Feed envelopes from the multipurpose feeder or the optional envelope feeder.
• Set the Paper Type to Envelope, and select the envelope size.
• Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without sealing, wrinkling, curling excessively, or releasing hazardous emissions.
• For the best performance, use envelopes made from 90 g/m 2 (24 lb bond) paper. Use up to 105 g/m 2 (28 lb bond) weight for envelopes as long as the cotton content is 25% or less. All-cotton envelopes must not exceed
90 g/m 2 (24 lb bond) weight.
• Use only new envelopes.
• To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
– Have excessive curl or twist
– Are stuck together or damaged in any way
– Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing
– Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars
– Have an interlocking design
– Have postage stamps attached
– Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position
– Have bent corners
– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes
• Adjust the width guide to fit the width of the envelopes.
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and the high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.
Printing
130
Tips on using labels
Print samples on the labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.
Note: Single-sided paper labels designed for laser printers are supported for occasional use: no more than 20 pages of labels a month. Vinyl, pharmacy, and dual-web labels are not supported.
When printing on labels:
• Feed labels from a 250-sheet tray, a 550-sheet tray, or the multipurpose feeder.
• Use labels designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that:
– The labels can withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.
– Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats can withstand up to 25 psi (172 kPa) pressure without delaminating, oozing around the edges, or releasing hazardous fumes.
• Do not use labels with slick backing material.
• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and cartridge warranties.
• Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 in.) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die-cuts of the label.
• Be sure adhesive backing does not reach to the sheet edge. Zone coating of the adhesive at least 1 mm (0.04 in.) away from edges is recommended. Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty.
• If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, remove a 1.6-mm (0.06-in.) strip on the leading and driver edge, and use a non-oozing adhesive.
• Portrait orientation works best, especially when printing bar codes.
Tips on using card stock
Card stock is heavy, single-ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness, and texture, can significantly impact print quality. Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities.
When printing on card stock:
• Feed card stock from a 250-sheet tray, a 550-sheet tray, or the multipurpose feeder.
• Make sure the Paper Type is Card Stock.
• Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting.
• Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper handling problems.
• Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without releasing hazardous emissions.
• Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer. Preprinting introduces semi-liquid and volatile components into the printer.
• Use grain short card stock when possible.
Printing
131
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Holding jobs in the printer
When sending a job to the printer, you can specify that you want the printer to hold the job in memory until you start the job from the printer control panel. All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs .
Note: Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs.
Job type
Confidential
Verify
Reserve
Repeat
Description
When you send a Confidential print job to the printer, you must create a PIN from the computer. The PIN must be four digits using the numbers 0–9. The job is held in printer memory until you enter the PIN from the printer control panel and choose to print or delete the job.
When you send a Verify print job, the printer prints one copy and holds the remaining copies in printer memory. Verify lets you examine the first copy to see if it is satisfactory before printing the remaining copies. Once all copies are printed, the job is automatically deleted from printer memory.
When you send a Reserve print job, the printer does not print the job immediately.
It stores the job in memory so you can print the job later. The job is held in memory until you delete it from the Held Jobs menu.
When you send a Repeat print job, the printer prints all requested copies of the job and stores the job in memory so you can print additional copies later. You can print additional copies as long as the job remains stored in memory.
Other types of held jobs include:
• Profiles from various sources
• Forms from a kiosk
• Bookmarks
• Jobs not printed, which are called parked jobs
Printing confidential and other held jobs from Windows
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after they print. Repeat and Reserve jobs continue to be held in the printer until you choose to delete them.
1 With a document open, click File ª Print.
2 Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3 Click Other Options, and then click Print and Hold.
4 Select your job type (Confidential, Reserve, Repeat, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential job, also enter a four-digit PIN.
5 Click OK or Print, and then go to the printer to release the job.
6 On the home screen, touch Held jobs.
Printing
132
7 Touch your user name.
Note: A maximum of 500 results can be displayed for held jobs. If your name does not appear, touch the down arrow until your name appears, or touch Search Held Jobs if there are a large number of held jobs in the printer.
8 Touch Confidential Jobs.
9 Enter your PIN.
10 Touch the job you want to print.
11 Touch Print, or touch the arrows to increase or decrease the number of copies, and then touch Print.
Printing confidential and other held jobs from a Macintosh computer
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after they print. Repeat and Reserve jobs continue to be held in the printer until you choose to delete them.
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the print options or Copies & Pages pop-up menu, choose Job Routing.
3 Select your job type (Confidential, Reserve, Repeat, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential job, also enter a four-digit PIN.
4 Click OK or Print, and then go to the printer to release the job.
5 On the home screen, touch Held jobs.
6 Touch your user name.
Note: A maximum of 500 results can be displayed for held jobs. If your name does not appear, touch the down arrow until your name appears, or touch Search Held Jobs if there are a large number of held jobs in the printer.
7 Touch Confidential Jobs.
8 Enter your PIN.
9 Touch the job you want to print.
10 Touch Print, or touch the arrows to increase or decrease the number of copies, and then touch Print.
Printing
133
Printing from a flash drive
A USB port is located on the printer control panel. Insert a flash drive to print supported file types. Supported file types include: .pdf, .gif, .jpeg, .jpg, .bmp, .png, .tiff, .tif, .pcx, and .dcx.
Many flash drives are tested and approved for use with the printer.
Notes:
• Hi-Speed flash drives must support the Full-speed standard. Flash drives supporting only USB Low-speed capabilities are not supported.
• USB devices must support the FAT ( File Allocation Tables ) system. Devices formatted with NTFS ( New Technology
File System ) or any other file system are not supported.
• If selecting an encrypted .pdf file, then enter the file password from the printer control panel.
• Before printing an encrypted .pdf file, enter the file password from the printer control panel.
• You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
To print from a flash drive:
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 Insert a flash drive into the USB port.
Notes:
• If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the printer ignores the flash drive.
• If you insert the flash drive while the printer is printing other jobs, then Printer Busy appears. After the other jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive.
3 Touch the document you want to print.
Note: Folders found on the flash drive appear as folders. File names are appended by the extension type (for example, .jpg).
Printing
134
4 Touch the arrows if you want to increase the number of printed copies.
5 Touch Print.
Note: Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then you can still print .pdf files from the flash drive as held jobs.
Printing information pages
Printing a directory list
A directory list shows the resources stored in flash memory or on the printer hard disk.
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch .
3 Touch Reports.
4 Touch the down arrow until Print Directory appears.
5 Touch Print Directory.
Printing the print quality test pages
Print the print quality test pages to isolate print quality problems.
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Hold down and while turning the printer on.
3 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears.
4 Touch the down arrow until Print Quality Pages appears.
5 Touch Print Quality Pages.
The print quality test pages print.
6 Touch Back.
7 Touch Exit Configuration.
Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1 Touch Cancel Jobs on the touch screen, or press on the keypad.
2 Touch the job you want to cancel.
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Printing
135
Canceling a print job from the computer
To cancel a print job, do one of the following:
For Windows users
In Windows Vista:
1 Click .
2 Click Control Panel.
3 Click Hardware and Sound.
4 Click Printers.
5 Double-click the printer icon.
6 Select the job to cancel.
7 From the keyboard, press Delete.
In Windows XP:
1 Click Start.
2 From Printers and Faxes, double-click the printer icon.
3 Select the job to cancel.
4 From the keyboard, press Delete.
From the Windows taskbar:
When you send a job to print, a small printer icon appears in the right corner of the taskbar.
1 Double-click the printer icon.
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.
2 Select a job to cancel.
3 From the keyboard, press Delete.
For Macintosh users
In Mac OS X version 10.5:
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
2 Click Print & Fax, and then double-click the printer icon.
3 From the printer window, select the job to cancel.
4 From the icon bar at the top of the window, click the Delete icon.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier:
1 From the Go menu, choose Applications.
2 Double-click Utilities, and then double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
3 Double-click the printer icon.
Printing
136
4 From the printer window, select the job to cancel.
5 From the icon bar at the top of the window, click the Delete icon.
Printing
137
Clearing jams
Jam error messages appear on the control panel display and include the area of the printer where the jam occurred.
When there is more than one jam, the number of jammed pages is displayed.
Avoiding jams
The following hints can help you avoid jams.
Paper tray recommendations
• Make sure the paper lies flat in the tray.
• Do not remove trays while the printer is printing.
• Do not load trays, the multipurpose feeder, or the envelope feeder while the printer is printing. Load them prior to printing, or wait for a prompt to load them.
• Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height does not exceed the indicated maximum height.
• Make sure the guides in the paper trays, multipurpose feeder, or envelope feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing too tightly against the paper or envelopes.
• Push all trays in firmly after loading paper.
Paper recommendations
•
• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
• Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same stack.
• Make sure all sizes and types are set correctly in the printer control panel menus.
• Store paper per the manufacturer's recommendations.
Envelope recommendations
• To reduce wrinkling, use the Envelope Enhance menu in the Paper menu.
• Do not feed envelopes that:
– Have excessive curl or twist
– Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing
– Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars
– Have an interlocking design
– Have postage stamps attached
– Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position
– Have bent corners
– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes
– Are stuck together or damaged in any way
Clearing jams
138
Understanding jam numbers and locations
When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location appears. Open doors and covers and remove trays to access jam locations. To resolve any paper jam message, you must clear all jammed paper from the paper path.
The following table lists the jams that can occur and the location of each jam:
Jam numbers Area
1 200–202 Printer
2 230–239
3 240–249
Duplex unit
Paper tray
Multipurpose feeder 4 250
5 260
6 270–279
7 280–282
Envelope feeder
Optional output bin
Finisher
8 283
9 290–294
Stapler
ADF cover
200 and 201 paper jams
1 Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam.
2 Lower the multipurpose feeder door.
Clearing jams
139
3 Push the release latch, and then open the front cover.
4 Lift and pull the print cartridge out of the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum on the underside of the cartridge. Use the cartridge handle whenever you are holding the cartridge.
Clearing jams
140
5 Place the print cartridge aside.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not leave the cartridge exposed to light for extended periods.
Warning—Potential Damage: The jammed paper may be covered with unfused toner which can stain garments and skin.
6 Remove the jammed paper.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Note: If the paper is not easy to remove, then open the rear door and remove the paper from there.
7 Align and reinstall the print cartridge.
8 Close the front cover.
9 Close the multipurpose feeder door.
10 Touch Continue.
202 paper jam
Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam. If the paper is exiting the printer, then pull the paper out, and then touch Continue.
If the paper is not exiting the printer:
1 Pull down the top rear door.
2 Remove the jammed paper.
3 Close the top rear door.
4 Touch Continue.
Clearing jams
141
230–239 paper jams
1 Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam.
2 Pull the standard tray out.
3 Pull down the bottom rear door.
4 Push the tab down.
5 Remove the jammed paper.
6 Close the bottom rear door.
7 Insert the standard tray.
8 Touch Continue.
Clearing jams
142
240–249 paper jams
1 Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam.
2 Pull the standard tray out.
3 Remove any jammed paper, and then close the tray.
4 Touch Continue.
5 If the jam message persists, then pull out any optional trays.
6 Remove the jammed paper, and then insert the trays.
7 Touch Continue.
Clearing jams
143
250 paper jam
1 Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam.
2 Remove the paper from the multipurpose feeder.
3 Flex the sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper.
Straighten the edges on a level surface.
4 Load the paper into the multipurpose feeder.
5 Slide the paper guide toward the inside of the tray until it lightly rests against the edge of the paper.
6 Touch Continue.
Clearing jams
144
260 paper jam
Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam. The envelope feeder feeds envelopes from the bottom of the stack; the bottom envelope will be the one that is jammed.
1 Lift the envelope weight.
2 Remove all envelopes.
3 If the jammed envelope has entered the printer and cannot be pulled out, then lift the envelope feeder up and then out of the printer, and then set it aside.
4 Remove the envelope from the printer.
Note: If you cannot remove the envelope, then the print cartridge will have to be removed. For more information,
see “200 and 201 paper jams” on page 139.
5 Reinstall the envelope feeder. Make sure it snaps into place.
6 Flex and stack the envelopes.
7 Load the envelopes in the envelope feeder.
8 Adjust the paper guide.
9 Lower the envelope weight.
10 Touch Continue.
270–279 paper jams
To clear a jam in the high-capacity output stacker or the 4-bin mailbox:
1 Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam.
2 If the paper is exiting into a bin, then pull the paper straight out, and then touch Continue.
If not, then continue with step 3.
3 Pull down the output bin door or doors.
4 Remove the jammed paper.
5 Close the output bin door or doors.
6 Touch Continue.
280–282 paper jams
1 Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam.
2 Pull down the StapleSmart finisher door.
3 Remove the jammed paper.
4 Close the StapleSmart finisher door.
5 Touch Continue.
Clearing jams
145
283 staple jams
1 Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam.
2 Press the latch to open the stapler door.
3 Pull the latch of the staple cartridge holder down, and then pull the holder out of the printer.
Clearing jams
146
4 Use the metal tab to lift the staple guard, and then remove any loose staples.
5 Close the staple guard.
6 Press down on the staple guard until it snaps into place.
Clearing jams
147
7 Push the cartridge holder firmly back into the stapler unit until the cartridge holder clicks into place.
8 Close the stapler door.
290–294 paper jams
1 Remove all original documents from the ADF.
2 Open the ADF cover, and then remove any jammed paper.
3 Close the ADF cover.
4 Open the scanner cover, and then remove any jammed pages.
Clearing jams
148
5 Open the bottom ADF door, and then remove any jammed pages.
6 Close the bottom ADF door and scanner cover.
7 Touch Restart Job.
Clearing jams
149
Understanding printer menus
Menus list
A number of menus are available to make it easy for you to change printer settings. To access the menus, touch on the home screen.
Paper Menu
Default Source
Paper Size/Type
Configure MP
Envelope Enhance
Substitute Size
Paper Texture
Paper Weight
Paper Loading
Custom Types
Custom Names
Custom Scan Sizes
Custom Bin Names
Universal Setup
Bin Setup
Reports
Menu Settings Page
Device Statistics
Network Setup Page
Network <x> Setup Page
Wireless Setup Page 1
Shortcut List
Fax Job Log
Fax Call Log
Copy Shortcuts
E-mail Shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Profiles List
NetWare Setup Page
Print Fonts
Print Directory
Asset Report
Network/Ports
Active NIC
Standard Network 2
SMTP Setup
Standard USB
Parallel <x>
Serial <x>
1 Only appears if a wireless card is installed.
2 Depending on the printer setup, this menu item appears as Standard Network or Network <x>.
Security
Edit Security Setups
Miscellaneous Security Settings
Confidential Print
Disc Wiping
Security Audit Log
Set Date and Time
Settings
General Settings
Copy Settings
Fax Settings
E-mail Settings
FTP Settings
Flash Drive Menu
Print Settings
Help
Print all guides
Copy guide
E-mail guide
Fax guide
FTP guide
Information guide
Print Defects guide
Understanding printer menus
150
Paper menu
Default Source menu
Menu item
Default Source
Tray <x>
MP Feeder
Envelope Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Env
Description
Sets a default paper source for all print jobs
Notes:
• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
• Only an installed paper source will appear as a menu setting.
• A paper source selected by a print job will override the Default Source setting for the duration of the print job.
• If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and
Paper Type settings match, then the trays are automatically linked. When one tray is empty, the job prints using the linked tray.
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for
MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
Paper Size/Type menu
Menu item
Tray <x> Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive 1
Oficio 1
Folio
Statement 1
Universal
Description
Specifies the paper size loaded in each tray
Notes:
• A4 is the international factory default setting. Letter is the US factory default setting.
• For trays with automatic size sensing, only the size detected by the hardware appears.
• Use this menu item to configure automatic tray linking. If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and Paper Type settings match, then the trays are automatically linked. When one tray is empty, the job prints using the linked tray.
• Automatic size sensing is not supported for Oficio, Folio, or Statement paper sizes.
• The 2000-sheet tray supports A4, Letter, and Legal paper sizes.
1 Appears only if Tray Size Sensing is turned off.
Note: Only installed trays, drawers, and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding printer menus
151
Menu item
Tray <x> Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton Paper
Custom Type <x>
MP Feeder Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
Other Envelope
Description
Specifies the type of paper loaded in each tray
Notes:
• Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type <x> is the factory default setting for all other trays.
• If available, a user-defined name will appear instead of Custom Type <x>.
• Use this menu item to configure automatic tray linking. If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and Paper Type settings match, then the trays are automatically linked. When one tray is empty, the job prints using the linked tray.
Specifies the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder
Notes:
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for
MP Feeder Size to appear as a menu item.
• A4 is the international factory default setting. Letter is the US factory default setting.
• The multipurpose feeder does not automatically sense paper size. The paper size value must be set.
1 Appears only if Tray Size Sensing is turned off.
Note: Only installed trays, drawers, and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding printer menus
152
Menu item
MP Feeder Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton Paper
Custom Type <x>
Envelope Feeder Size
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
Other Envelope
Envelope Feeder Type
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Custom Type <x>
Description
Specifies the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder
Notes:
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for
MP Feeder Type to appear as a menu item.
• Plain paper is the factory default setting.
Specifies the envelope size loaded in the envelope feeder
Note: DL Envelope is the international factory default setting. 10 Envelope is the US factory default setting.
Manual Paper Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio
Folio
Statement
Universal
Specifies the type of envelope loaded in the envelope feeder
Notes:
• Envelope is the factory default setting.
• The Custom Type setting can be used to store up to six types of envelopes.
Specifies the size of the paper being manually loaded
Note: A4 is the international factory default setting. Letter is the US factory default setting.
1 Appears only if Tray Size Sensing is turned off.
Note: Only installed trays, drawers, and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding printer menus
153
Menu item
Manual Paper Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton Paper
Custom Type <x>
Description
Specifies the type of paper being manually loaded
Note: Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
Manual Envelope Size
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
Other Envelope
Manual Envelope Type
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Custom Type <x>
Specifies the size of the envelope being manually loaded
Note: DL Envelope is the international factory default setting. 10 Envelope is the US factory default setting.
Specifies the type of envelope being manually loaded
Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.
1 Appears only if Tray Size Sensing is turned off.
Note: Only installed trays, drawers, and feeders are listed in this menu.
Configure MP menu
Menu item
Configure MP
Cassette
Manual
First
Description
Determines when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder
Notes:
• Cassette is the factory default setting.
• The Cassette setting configures the multipurpose feeder as an automatic paper source.
• When Manual is selected, the multipurpose feeder can be used only for manual feed print jobs.
• If paper is loaded in the multipurpose feeder and First is selected, then paper always feeds from the multipurpose feeder first.
Understanding printer menus
154
Envelope Enhance
The envelope conditioner significantly reduces the wrinkling of some envelopes.
Menu item
Envelope Enhance
Off
1 (Least)
2
3
4
5
6 (Most)
Description
Enables or disables the envelope conditioner
Notes:
• The factory default setting is 5.
• If noise reduction is more important than wrinkle reduction, then decrease the setting.
Substitute Size menu
Menu item
Substitute Size
Off
Statement/A5
Letter/A4
All Listed
Description
Substitutes a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available
Notes:
• All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are allowed.
• The Off setting indicates no size substitutions are allowed.
• Setting a substitution lets the job print without a Change Paper message appearing.
Paper Texture menu
Menu item
Plain Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Card Stock Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Transparency Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Description
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative texture of the card stock loaded in a specific tray
Notes:
• Normal is the factory default setting.
• Settings appear only if card stock is supported.
Specifies the relative texture of the transparencies loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
155
Menu item
Recycled Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Bond Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Envelope Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Rough Envelope Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Letterhead Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Preprinted Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Colored Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Light Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Heavy Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Rough Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Description
Specifies the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative texture of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded in a specific tray
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
156
Menu item
Custom <x> Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Description
Specifies the relative texture of the custom paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Paper Weight menu
Menu item
Plain Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Card Stock Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Transparency Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Recycled Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Bond Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Rough Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Letterhead Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Description
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative weight of the card stock loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative weight of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative weight of the rough envelopes loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
157
Menu item
Preprinted Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Colored Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Light Weight
Light
Heavy Weight
Heavy
Rough Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Custom <x>
Light
Normal
Heavy
Description
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative weight of the custom paper type loaded in a specific tray
Notes:
• Normal is the factory default setting.
• Settings appear only if the custom type is supported.
Paper Loading menu
Menu item
Card Stock Loading
Duplex
Off
Recycled Loading
Duplex
Off
Bond Loading
Duplex
Off
Letterhead Loading
Duplex
Off
Notes:
Description
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Card Stock as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Recycled as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Bond as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Letterhead as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
• Duplex sets the printer default to 2-sided printing for every print job unless 1-sided printing is selected from Print
Properties in Windows or the Print dialog in Macintosh.
• If Duplex is selected, all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including 1-sided jobs.
Understanding printer menus
158
Menu item
Preprinted Loading
Duplex
Off
Colored Loading
Duplex
Off
Light Loading
Duplex
Off
Heavy Loading
Duplex
Off
Rough Loading
Duplex
Off
Custom <x> Loading
Duplex
Off
Description
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Preprinted as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Colored as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Light as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Heavy as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Rough as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Custom <x> as the paper type
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Custom <x> Loading is available only if the custom type is supported.
Notes:
• Duplex sets the printer default to 2-sided printing for every print job unless 1-sided printing is selected from Print
Properties in Windows or the Print dialog in Macintosh.
• If Duplex is selected, all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including 1-sided jobs.
Custom Types menu
Menu item
Custom Type <x>
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Envelope
Description
Associates a paper or specialty media type with a factory default Custom Type <x> name or a user-defined Custom Name created from the Embedded Web Server or MarkVision Professional
Notes:
• Paper is the factory default setting.
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Recycled
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Envelope
Specifies a paper type when the Recycled setting is selected in other menus
Notes:
• Paper is the factory default setting.
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Understanding printer menus
159
Custom Names menu
Menu item
Custom Name <x>
<none>
Definition
Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces a Custom Type
<x> name in the printer menus.
Custom Scan Sizes menu
Menu item
Custom Scan Size <x>
Scan Size Name
Width
3–14.17 inches (76–360 mm)
Height
3–14.17 inches (76–360 mm)
Orientation
Landscape
Portrait
2 scans per side
Off
On
ADF Pick Roller Force
User Default
30%
40%
50%
60%
70%
80%
Description
Specifies a custom scan size name and options. This name replaces a Custom
Scan Size <x> name in the printer menus.
Notes:
• 8.5 Inches is the US factory default setting for Width. 216 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Width.
• 14 Inches is the US factory default setting for Height. 356 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Height.
• Landscape is the factory default setting for Orientation.
• Off is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side.
• User Default is the factory default setting for ADF Pick Roller Force.
Custom Bin Names menu
Menu Item
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Description
Specifies a custom name for the Standard Bin
Specifies a custom name for Bin 1
Understanding printer menus
160
Universal Setup menu
These menu items are used to specify the height, width, and feed direction of the Universal Paper Size. The Universal
Paper Size is a user-defined paper size setting. It is listed with the other paper size settings and includes similar options, such as support for duplex printing and printing multiple pages on one sheet.
Menu item
Units of Measure
Inches
Millimeters
Portrait Width
3–14 inches
76–360 mm
Portrait Height
3–14 inches
76–360 mm
Feed Direction
Short Edge
Long Edge
Description
Identifies the units of measure
Notes:
• Inches is the US factory default setting.
• Millimeters is the international factory default setting.
Sets the portrait width
Notes:
• If the width exceeds the maximum, the printer uses the maximum width allowed.
• 8.5 inches is the US factory default setting. Inches can be increased in 0.01-inch increments.
• 216 mm is the international factory default setting. Millimeters can be increased in 1-mm increments.
Sets the portrait height
Notes:
• If the height exceeds the maximum, the printer uses the maximum height allowed.
• 14 inches is the US factory default setting. Inches can be increased in
0.01-inch increments.
• 356 mm is the international factory default setting. Millimeters can be increased in 1-mm increments.
Specifies the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either direction
Notes:
• Short Edge is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge appears only if the longest edge is shorter than the maximum width supported in the tray.
Bin Setup menu
Menu Item
Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin <x>
Description
Identifies installed output bins
Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
161
Menu Item
Configure Bins
Mailbox
Link
Mail Overflow
Link Optional
Type Assignment
Description
Specifies configuration options for output bins
Notes:
• Mailbox is the factory default setting.
• The Mailbox setting treats each bin as a separate mailbox.
• The Link setting links together all available output bins.
• The Mail Overflow setting treats each bin as a separate mailbox until a bin becomes full, and then the printer automatically diverts sheets to an overflow bin.
• The Link Optional setting links together all available output bins except the standard bin and only appears when at least two optional bins are installed.
• The Type Assignment setting assigns each paper type to an output bin.
Selects an output bin for each supported paper type
Available selections for each type are:
Disabled
Standard Bin
Bin <x>
Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
Assign Type/Bin
Plain Paper Bin
Card Stock Bin
Transparency Bin
Recycled Bin
Bond Bin
Envelope Bin
Rough Envelope Bin
Letterhead Bin
Preprinted Bin
Colored Bin
Light Bin
Heavy Bin
Rough Bin
Custom <x> Bin
Reports menu
Note: When you select a menu item from the Reports menu, the indicated report prints.
Menu item
Menu Settings Page
Device Statistics
Description
Prints a report containing information about paper loaded into trays, installed memory, the total page count, alarms, timeouts, the control panel language, the TCP/IP address, the status of supplies, the status of the network connection, and other information
Prints a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details about printed pages
Understanding printer menus
162
Menu item
Network Setup Page
Network <x> Setup Page
Wireless Setup Page
Shortcut List
Fax Job Log
Fax Call Log
Copy Shortcuts
E-mail Shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Profiles List
NetWare Setup Page
Print Fonts
Print Directory
Asset Report
Description
Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address information
Note: This menu item appears only for network printers or printers connected to print servers.
Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address information
Notes:
• This menu item is available when more than one network option is installed.
• This menu item appears only for network printers or printers connected to print servers.
Prints a report containing information about the wireless network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address information
Notes:
• This menu item is available when a wireless card is installed.
• This menu item appears only for network printers or printers connected to print servers.
Prints a report containing information about configured shortcuts
Prints a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes
Prints a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received, and blocked calls
Prints a report containing information about copy shortcuts
Prints a report containing information about e-mail shortcuts
Prints a report containing information about fax shortcuts
Prints a report containing information about FTP shortcuts
Prints a list of profiles stored in the printer
Prints a report containing NetWare-specific information about the network settings
Note: This menu item appears only for printers with an internal print server installed.
Prints a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in the printer
Prints a list of all the resources stored on an optional flash memory card or printer hard disk
Notes:
• Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.
• The optional flash memory or printer hard disk must be installed correctly and working properly.
Prints a report containing asset information including the printer serial number and model name. The report contains text and UPC barcodes that can be scanned into an asset database.
Understanding printer menus
163
Network/Ports menu
Active NIC menu
Menu item
Active NIC
Auto
<list of available network cards>
Description
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only if an optional network card is installed.
Standard Network or Network <x> menus
Note: Only active ports appear in this menu; all inactive ports are omitted.
Menu item
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
NPA Mode
Off
Auto
Description
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Understanding printer menus
164
Menu item
Network Buffer
Auto
3K to <maximum size allowed>
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
Std Network Setup
Reports or Network Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
AppleTalk
NetWare
LexLink
Net <x> Setup
Reports or Network Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk
NetWare
LexLink
Description
Sets the size of the network input buffer
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The value can be changed in 1-K increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Temporarily stores jobs on the printer hard disk before printing. This menu only appears if a formatted disk is installed.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The On value buffers jobs on the printer hard disk. This menu selection appears only when a formatted disk is installed and is not defective.
• The Auto setting buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
• The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
For descriptions and settings of the network setup menus, see the following:
•
“Network Reports menu” on page 167
•
“Network Card menu” on page 167
•
•
•
•
•
•
Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless network.
Understanding printer menus
165
SMTP Setup menu
Use the following menu to configure the SMTP server.
Menu item
Primary SMTP Gateway
Primary SMTP Gateway Port
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
SMTP Timeout
5–30
Description
Specifies SMTP server port information
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
Reply Address
Use SSL
Disabled
Negotiate
Required
SMTP Server Authentication
No authentication required
Login / Plain
CRAM-MD5
Digest-MD5
NTLM
Kerberos 5
Device-Initiated E-mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
User-Initiated E-mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Use Session User ID and Password
Use Session E-mail address and Password
Prompt User
Device Userid
Device password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain
Specifies the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to send the e-mail
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
Specifies server information. This is a required item.
Notes:
• The message box has a limitation of 512 characters.
• Disabled is the factory default setting for Use SSL.
Specifies the type of user authentication required for scan to e-mail privileges
Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.
Specifies server information
Notes:
• The message boxes have a limitation of 512 characters.
• None is the factory default setting for Device-Initiated E-mail and
User-Initiated E-mail.
Understanding printer menus
166
Network Reports menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports ª Standard Network or Network <x> ª Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup ª Reports or
Network Reports
Menu item
Print Setup Page
Print NetWare Setup Page
Description
Prints a report containing information about the current network setup
Notes:
• The Setup Page contains information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address.
• The NetWare Setup Page menu item appears only on models that support NetWare and shows information about NetWare settings.
Network Card menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports ª Standard Network or Network <x> ª Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup ª Network Card
Menu item
View Card Status
Connected
Disconnected
View Card Speed
Network Address
UAA
LAA
Job Timeout
0-225 seconds
Description
Lets you view the connection status of the Network Card
Lets you view the speed of a currently active network card
Lets you view the network addresses
Banner Page
Off
On
Sets the amount of time in seconds that a network print job can take before it is canceled
Notes:
• 90 seconds is the factory default setting.
• A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.
• If a value of 1–9 is selected, then the setting is saved as 10.
Allows the printer to print a banner page
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
TCP/IP menu
Use the following menu items to view or set the TCP/IP information.
Note: This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers.
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Understanding printer menus
167
Network/Ports ª Standard Network or Network <x> ª Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup ª TCP/IP
Menu item
Activate
On
Off
View Hostname
Description
Activates TCP/IP
Note: On is the factory default setting.
IP Address
Lets you view the current TCP/IP hostname
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP Address
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that support BOOTP and RARP.
Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP Netmask
Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP Gateway
Specifies the DHCP address and parameter assignment setting
Netmask
Gateway
Enable DHCP
On
Off
Enable RARP
On
Off
Enable BOOTP
On
Off
AutoIP
Yes
No
Enable FTP/TFTP
Yes
No
Enable HTTP Server
Yes
No
WINS Server Address
DNS Server Address
Specifies the RARP address assignment setting
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Specifies the BOOTP address assignment setting
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Specifies the Zero Configuration Networking setting
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enables the built-in FTP server, which allows you to send files to the printer using the
File Transfer Protocol.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enables the built-in web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, the printer can be monitored and managed remotely using a web browser.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Lets you view or change the current WINS Server Address
Lets you view or change the current DNS Server Address
Understanding printer menus
168
IPv6 menu
Use the following menu items to view or set the Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) information.
Note: This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers.
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports ª Standard Network or Network <x> ª Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup ª IPv6
Menu item
Enable IPv6
On
Off
Auto Configuration
On
Off
View Hostname
View Address
View Router Address
Enable DHCPv6
On
Off
Description
Enables IPv6 in the printer
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Specifies whether the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6 address configuration entries provided by a router
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Lets you view the current setting
Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
Enables DHCPv6 in the printer
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Wireless menu
Use the following menu items to view or configure the wireless internal print server settings.
Note: This menu is available only for models connected to a wireless network.
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports ª Network <x> ª Net <x> Setup ª Wireless
Menu item
Network Mode
Infrastructure
Ad hoc
Description
Specifies the network mode
Notes:
• Infrastructure mode lets the printer access a network using an access point.
• Ad hoc is the factory default setting. Ad hoc mode configures the printer for wireless networking directly between it and a computer.
Specifies the wireless standard for the wireless network Compatibility
802.11n
802.11b/g
802.11b/g/n
Choose Network
<list of available networks>
View Signal Quality
Lets you select an available network for the printer to use
Lets you view the quality of the wireless connection
Understanding printer menus
169
Menu item
View Security Mode
Description
Lets you view the encryption method for the wireless connection.
“Disabled” indicates that the wireless network is not encrypted.
AppleTalk menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports ª Standard Network or Network <x> ª Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup ª AppleTalk
Menu item
Activate
On
Off
View Name
Description
Activates AppleTalk support
Note: On is the factory default setting.
View Address
Set Zone
<list of zones available on the network>
Shows the assigned AppleTalk name
Note: The name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Shows the assigned AppleTalk address
Note: The address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Provides a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network
Note: The default setting is the default zone for the network. If no default zone exists, the zone marked with an * is the default setting.
NetWare menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports ª Standard Network or Network <x> ª Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup ª NetWare
Menu item
Activate
Yes
No
View Login Name
Description
Activates NetWare support
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Print Mode
Network Number
Select SAP Frames
Ethernet 802.2
Ethernet 802.3
Ethernet Type II
Ethernet SNAP
Lets you view the assigned NetWare login name
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Lets you view the assigned NetWare print mode
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Lets you view the assigned NetWare network number
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Enables the Ethernet frame type setting
Note: On is the factory default setting for all menu items.
Understanding printer menus
170
Menu item
Packet Burst
Yes
No
NSQ/GSQ Mode
Yes
No
Description
Reduces network traffic by allowing the transfer and acknowledgement of multiple data packets to and from the NetWare server
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Specifies the NSQ/GSQ Mode setting
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
LexLink menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports ª Standard Network or Network <x> ª Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup ª LexLink menu
Menu item
Activate
On
Off
View Nickname
Description
Activates LexLink support
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Lets you view the assigned LexLink nickname
Note: The LexLink nickname can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
Standard USB menu
Menu item
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Description
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if the PS
SmartSwitch setting is On. It uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch setting is Off.
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if the PCL
SmartSwitch setting is On. It uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch setting is Off.
Understanding printer menus
171
Menu item
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
USB Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to <maximum size allowed>
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
USB With ENA
ENA Address
ENA Netmask
ENA Gateway
Description
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Sets the size of the USB input buffer
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The Disabled setting turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed.
• The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-K increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether the Resource Save setting is On or Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Temporarily stores jobs on the printer hard disk before printing
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The On setting buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.
• The Auto setting buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
• The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Sets the network address, netmask, or gateway information for an external print server that is attached to the printer using a USB cable.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.
Understanding printer menus
172
Parallel <x> menu
This menu appears only if an optional parallel card is installed.
Menu item
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Parallel Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to <max size allowed>
Description
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a parallel port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a parallel port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if
PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Sets the size of the parallel input buffer
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The Disabled setting turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed.
• The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1K increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the USB, serial, and network buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Understanding printer menus
173
Menu item
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Advanced Status
On
Off
Protocol
Standard
Fastbytes
Honor Init
On
Off
Parallel Mode 2
On
Off
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
Parallel With ENA
ENA Address
ENA Netmask
ENA Gateway
Description
Temporarily stores jobs on the printer hard disk before printing
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The Off setting does not buffer print jobs to the printer hard disk.
• The On setting buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.
• The Auto setting buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Enables bidirectional communication through the parallel port
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• The Off setting disables parallel port negotiation.
Specifies the parallel port protocol
Notes:
• Fastbytes is the factory default setting. It provides compatibility with most existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting.
• The Standard setting tries to resolve parallel port communication problems.
Determines whether or not the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the computer
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the parallel port. Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the computer is turned on.
Determines whether the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of strobe
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu appears only if a standard or optional parallel port is available.
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
• The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Sets the network address, netmask, or gateway information for an external print server that is attached to the printer using a parallel cable.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through a parallel port.
Understanding printer menus
174
Serial <x> menu
This menu appears only if an optional serial card is installed.
Menu item
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Serial Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to <maximum size allowed>
Description
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if
PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• When the On setting is used, the printer performs NPA processing. If the data is not in NPA format, it is rejected as bad data.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not perform NPA processing.
• When the Auto setting is used, the printer examines data, determines the format, and then processes it appropriately.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Sets the size of the serial input buffer
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The Disabled setting turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed.
• The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1-K increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the parallel, USB, and network buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Understanding printer menus
175
Menu item
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Baud
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
138200
172800
230400
345600
Data Bits
7
8
Serial Protocol
DTR
DTR/DSR
XON/XOFF
XON/XOFF/DTR
XON/XOFF/DTRDSR
Robust XON
On
Off
Description
Temporarily stores jobs on the printer hard disk before printing
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The Off setting does not buffer print jobs to the hard disk.
• The On setting buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.
• The Auto setting buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Selects the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port
Notes:
• DTR is the factory default setting.
• DTR/DSR is a hardware handshaking setting.
• XON/XOFF is a software handshaking setting.
• XON/XOFF/DTR and XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR are combined hardware and software handshaking settings.
Determines whether or not the printer communicates availability to the computer
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to
XON/XOFF.
Specifies the rate at which data can be received through the serial port
Notes:
• 9600 is the factory default setting.
• 138200, 172800, 230400, and 345600 baud rates are displayed only in the
Standard Serial menu. These settings do not appear in the Serial Option or Serial
Option 2 menus.
Specifies the number of data bits that are sent in each transmission frame
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
176
Menu item
Parity
Even
Odd
None
Ignore
Honor DSR
On
Off
Description
Sets the parity for serial input and output data frames
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Determines whether the printer uses the DSR Signal. DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The serial port uses DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical noise in the serial cable. The electrical noise can cause stray characters to print. Select On to prevent stray characters from printing.
• This menu item appears only if Serial RS-232/RS-422 is set to RS 232.
Security menu
Miscellaneous menu
Menu item
Panel Logins
Login failures
Failure time frame
Lockout time
Login timeout
Description
Limits the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control panel before all users are locked out
Notes:
• “Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are locked out. Settings range from 1–50. 3 attempts is the factory default setting.
• “Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1–60 minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting.
• “Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the login failures limit. Settings range from 0–60 minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting. 0 indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time.
• “Login timeout” specifies how long the printer remains idle on the Home screen before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1–900 seconds.
300 seconds is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
177
Menu item
Remote Logins
Login failures
Failure time frame
Lockout time
Login timeout
Description
Limits the number and time frames of failed login attempts from a computer before all remote users are locked out
Notes:
• “Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are locked out. Settings range from 1–50. 3 attempts is the factory default setting.
• “Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1–60 minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting.
• “Lockout time” specifies how long a user is locked out after exceeding the login failures limit. Settings range from 0–60 minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting. 0 indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time.
• “Login timeout” specifies how long the remote interface remains idle before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1–900 seconds. 300 seconds is the factory default setting.
Confidential Print menu
Menu item
Max Invalid PIN
Off
2–10
Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Description
Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered
Notes:
• Off is the default setting.
• This menu item appears only if a printer hard disk is installed.
• Once a limit is reached, the jobs for that user name and that PIN are deleted.
Limits the amount of time a confidential job stays in the printer before it is deleted
Notes:
• Off is the default setting.
• If the Job Expiration setting is changed while confidential jobs reside on the printer RAM or printer hard disk, the expiration time for those print jobs does not change to the new default value.
• If the printer is turned off, all confidential jobs held in printer RAM are deleted.
Understanding printer menus
178
Disk Wiping menu
Menu item
Automatic Wiping
Off
On
Manual Wiping
Start now
Do not start now
Automatic Method
Single pass
Multiple pass
Description
Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system from the printer hard disk. All permanent data on the printer hard disk is preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.
Automatic Wiping marks all disk space used by a previous job and does not permit the file system to reuse this space until it has been sanitized.
Only Automatic Wiping enables users to activate disk wiping without having to take the printer offline for an extended amount of time.
Notes:
• This menu item appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.
• Off is the default setting.
• Due to the large amount of resources required for Automatic Wiping, activating this option may decrease printer performance, especially if the printer requires hard disk space faster than it can be wiped and returned to service.
Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system from the printer hard disk. All permanent data on the printer hard disk is preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.
Manual Wiping overwrites all disk space that has been used to hold data from a print job that has been processed (i.e. printed). This type of wipe does not erase any information related to an unprocessed print job.
Notes:
• This menu item appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.
• "Do not start now" is the default setting.
• If the Disk Wiping access control is activated, then a user must successfully authenticate and have the required authorization in order to initiate the disk wipe.
Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system from the printer hard disk. All permanent data on the printer hard disk is preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.
Notes:
• This menu item appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.
• Single pass is the default setting.
• Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple pass method only .
Understanding printer menus
179
Menu item
Manual Method
Single pass
Multiple pass
Scheduled Method
Single pass
Multiple pass
Description
Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system from the printer hard disk. All permanent data on the printer hard disk is preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.
Both manual and scheduled wiping allow the file system to reuse marked disk space without first having to wipe it.
Notes:
• This menu item appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.
• Single pass is the default setting.
• Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple Pass method only .
Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system from the printer hard disk. All permanent data on the printer hard disk is preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.
Both manual and scheduled wiping allow the file system to reuse marked disk space without first having to wipe it.
Notes:
• This menu item appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.
• Single pass is the default setting.
• Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple Pass method only .
• Scheduled wipes are initiated without displaying a user warning or confirmation message.
Security Audit Log menu
Menu item
Export Log
Description
Enables an authorized user to export the security log
Notes:
• To export the log from the printer control panel, a flash drive must be attached to the printer.
• From the Embedded Web Server, the log can be downloaded to a computer.
Specifies whether audit logs are deleted
Note: Delete Now is the factory default setting.
Delete Log
Delete now
Do not delete
Configure Log
Enable Audit
Enable Remote Syslog
Remote Syslog Facility
Severity of events to log
Specifies whether and how the audit logs are created
Note: Factory default settings enable the security audit log.
Understanding printer menus
180
Set Date/Time menu
Menu item
View Date/Time
Set Date/Time
<input date/time>
Time Zone
<list of time zones>
Observe DST
On
Off
Enable NTP
On
Off
Description
Lets you view the current date and time settings for the printer
Note: Date/Time is set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM format.
Note: GMT is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time associated with the Time Zone setting.
Enables Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a network
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Settings menu
General Settings menu
Menu item
Display Language
English
Francais
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Portuguese
Suomi
Russian
Polski
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Korean
Japanese
Description
Sets the language of the text appearing on the display
Note: All languages may not be available for all printers.
Understanding printer menus
181
Menu item
Eco-Mode
Off
Energy
Energy/Paper
Paper
ADF Loaded Beep
Enabled
Disabled
Quiet Mode
Off
On
Run Initial setup
Yes
No
Description
Minimizes the use of energy, paper, or specialty media
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. Off resets the printer to its factory default settings.
• The Energy setting minimizes the power used by the printer.
Performance may be affected but not print quality.
• Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media needed for a print job by duplexing each page. Performance may be affected but not print quality.
• Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and specialty media.
Specifies whether the ADF emits a beep when paper is loaded
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Reduces the amount of noise produced by the printer
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• On configures the printer to produce as little noise as possible.
Instructs the printer to run the setup wizard
Notes:
• Yes is the factory default setting.
• After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the
Country select screen, the default becomes No.
Understanding printer menus
182
Menu item
Keyboard
Keyboard Type
English
Francais
Francais Canadien
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Suomi
Portuguese
Russian
Polski
Swiss German
Swiss French
Turkce
Korean
Custom Key <x>
Accents/Symbols Tab
On
Off
Russian/Polish Tab
On
Off
Korean Tab
On
Off
Paper Sizes
U.S.
Metric
Scan to PC Port Range
<port range>
Description
Specifies a language and custom key information for the printer control panel keyboard. The additional tabs enable access to accent marks and symbols from the printer control panel keyboard.
Specifies the printer factory default measurements. The default is determined by the country/region selection in the initial setup wizard.
Specifies a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking firewall. The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers separated by a semicolon.
Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
183
Menu item
Displayed Information
Left side
Right side
Custom Text <x>
<text entry>
Black Toner
Display When Supply Registers
Off
Early Warning
Low
Near End of Life
End of Life
Type of Message to Display
Default
Alternate
Default Message
<text entry>
Alternate Message
<text entry>
Displayed Information (continued)
Paper Jam
Load Paper
Service Errors
Description
Specifies what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of the home screen
For the Left side and Right side options, choose from the following options:
None
IP Address
Hostname
Contact Name
Location
Date/Time mDNS/DDNS Service Name
Zero Configuration Name
Cartridge Level
Custom Text <x>
Notes:
• IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side.
• Date/Time is the factory default setting for Right side.
• Off is the factory default setting for Display When Supply
Registers.
• Default is the factory default setting for Type of Message to
Display.
The displayed information for Paper Jam, Load Paper, and Service
Errors can be customized with the following options:
Activate
Yes
No
Type of Message to Display
Default
Alternate
Default Message
<text entry>
Alternate Message
<text entry>
Notes:
• No is the factory default setting for Activate.
• Default is the factory default setting for Type of Message to
Display.
Understanding printer menus
184
Menu item
Home screen customization
Change Language
Copy
Copy Shortcuts
Fax
Fax Shortcuts
E-mail Shortcuts
FTP
FTP Shortcuts
Search Held Jobs
Held Jobs
USB Drive
Profiles
Bookmarks
Jobs by user
Date Format
MM-DD-YYYY
DD-MM-YYYY
YYYY-MM-DD
Time Format
12 hour A.M./P.M.
24 hour clock
Screen Brightness
20–100
One Page Copy
On
Off
Description
Additional buttons can be added to the Home screen, and default buttons can be removed.
Available selections for each button are:
Display
Do Not Display
Formats the printer date
Formats the printer time
Specifies the brightness of the printer control panel screen
Sets the copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
185
Menu item
Output Lighting
Standard Bin LED
Normal/Standby Mode
Bright
Dim
Off
Power Saver
Bright
Dim
Off
Output Option Bin LEDs
Normal/Standby Mode
Bright
Dim
Off
Power Saver
Bright
Dim
Off
Show Bookmarks
On
Off
Allow Background Removal
On
Off
Allow Custom Job Scans
On
Off
Scanner Jam Recovery
Job level
Page level
Web Page Refresh Rate
30–300
Contact Name
Description
Sets the amount of light from the standard bin or an optional output bin
Notes:
• In Normal/Standby Mode, the factory default is Bright.
• In Power Saver Mode, the factory default is Dim.
Specifies whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area
Note: On is the factory default setting. When On is selected, bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area.
Specifies whether image background removal is allowed during copy, fax, e-mail, FTP, or scan to USB
Note: On is the factory default setting. The background of the image will be removed.
Lets you scan multiple jobs to one file
Note: On is the factory default setting. If On is selected, the Allow
Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs.
Specifies how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs in the ADF
Notes:
• If Job level is selected, the entire job must be rescanned if any pages jam.
• If Page level is selected, rescan from the jammed page forward.
Specifies the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server refreshes
Note: 120 seconds is the factory default setting.
Specifies a contact name for the printer
Note: The contact name will be stored on the Embedded Web
Server.
Understanding printer menus
186
Menu item
Location
Alarms
Alarm Control
Cartridge Alarm
Staple Alarm
Timeouts
Job Hold Timeout
Disabled
5–255
Timeouts
Standby Mode
Disabled
2–240
Timeouts
Power Saver Mode
Disabled
2–240
Timeouts
Screen Timeout
15–300
Description
Specifies the location of the printer
Note: The location will be stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Sets an alarm to sound when the printer requires operator intervention
Available selections for each alarm type are:
Off
Single
Continuous
Notes:
• Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control. Single sounds three quick beeps.
• Off is the factory default setting for Toner Alarm and Staple
Alarm. Off means no alarm will sound.
• Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds.
• Staple Alarm is available only when the finisher is installed.
Sets the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and continues to print other jobs in the print queue
Notes:
• 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.
Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity before the system enters a lower power state
Note: 15 minutes is the factory default setting.
Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity before some systems begin entering a minimum power state.
Notes:
• 60 minutes is the factory default setting.
• Power Saver does not interact with Standby Mode.
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before returning the printer display to a Ready state
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
187
Menu item
Timeouts
Print Timeout
Disabled
1–255
Timeouts
Wait Timeout
Disabled
15–65535
Print Recovery
Auto Continue
Disabled
5–255
Print Recovery
Jam Recovery
On
Off
Auto
Print Recovery
Page Protect
On
Off
Description
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an end-of-job message before canceling the remainder of the print job
Notes:
• 90 seconds is the factory default setting.
• When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see if any new print jobs are waiting.
• Print Timeout is available only when using PCL or PPDS emulation. This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs.
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional data before canceling a print job
Notes:
• 40 seconds is the factory default setting.
• Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using
PostScript emulation. This setting has no effect on PCL or
PPDS emulation print jobs.
Lets the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline situations when not resolved within the specified time period
Notes:
• Disabled is the factory default setting.
• 5–255 is a range of time in seconds.
Specifies whether the printer reprints jammed pages
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks.
• On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.
• Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.
Lets the printer successfully print a page that may not have printed otherwise
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. Off prints a partial page when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.
• On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the entire page prints.
Understanding printer menus
188
Menu item
Factory Defaults
Do Not Restore
Restore Now
Description
Returns the printer settings to the factory default settings
Notes:
• Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. Do Not Restore keeps the user-defined settings.
• Restore returns all printer settings to the factory default settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected.
Copy Settings menu
Menu item
Content
Text/Photo
Photograph
Printed Image
Text
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided to 1 sided
1 sided to 2 sided
2 sided to 1 sided
2 sided to 2 sided
Description
Specifies the type of content contained in the copy job
Notes:
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures.
• Photograph tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures.
This setting increases the time it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This increases the amount of information saved.
• Printed Image is used when jobs are composed primarily of images. Printed
Image converts the images to halftone. Halftoning makes a grayscale or color image printable by transforming it to a pattern of small spots with a limited number of colors.
• Text emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background.
Specifies whether an original document is duplex (two-sided) or simplex (onesided), and then specifies whether the copy should be duplex or simplex
Notes:
• 1 sided to 1 sided—The original page has printing on one side. The copied page will have printing on one side.
• 1 sided to 2 sided—The original page has printing on one side. The copied page will have printing on both sides. For example, if the original is six sheets, the copy is three sheets with printing on both sides.
• 2 sided to 1 sided—The original page has printing on both sides. The copied page will have printing on only one side. For example, if the original draft is three sheets of paper with an image on each side of each sheet, then the copy is six sheets with only one image on one side of each sheet.
• 2 sided to 2 sided—The original page has printing on both sides. The copy mimics the original exactly.
Understanding printer menus
189
Menu item
Paper Saver
Off
2 on 1 Portrait
2 on 1 Landscape
4 on 1 Portrait
4 on 1 Landscape
Print Page Borders
On
Off
Collate
On
Off
Staple
On
Off
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Universal
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Business Card
Custom Scan Size <x>
A4
A5
Oficio (Mexico)
A6
JIS B5
Book Original
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Letter/Legal
Copy To Source
Tray <x>
Single Sheet Feeder
Multi Sheet Feeder
Auto Size Match
Transparency Separators
On
Off
Description
Sets two or four sheets of an original document together on the same page
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Specifies whether a border is printed around the edge of the page at the margins
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when making multiple copies of the job
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enables stapling
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Specifies the paper size of the original document
Specifies the paper source for copy jobs
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Places a sheet of paper between transparencies
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
190
Menu item
Separator Sheets
None
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Separator Source
Tray <x>
Manual Feeder
Envelope Feeder
Darkness
1–9
Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin <x>
Number of Copies
Header/Footer
Top left
Top left
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Bates number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Enter custom text
Header/Footer
Top middle
Top middle
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Bates number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Enter custom text
Description
Places a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs based on the value selected
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Specifies a paper source
Specifies the level of darkness for the copy job
Specifies which output bin receives the copy after it is printed
Specifies the number of copies for the copy job
Specifies header/footer information for the top left of the page
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for Top left.
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.
Specifies header/footer information for the middle of the page
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for Top middle.
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.
Understanding printer menus
191
Menu item
Header/Footer
Top right
Top right
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Bates number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Enter custom text
Header/Footer
Bottom left
Bottom left
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Bates number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Enter custom text
Header/Footer
Bottom middle
Bottom middle
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Bates number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Enter custom text
Description
Specifies header/footer information for the top right of the page
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for Top right.
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.
Specifies header/footer information for the bottom left of the page
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for Bottom left.
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.
Specifies header/footer information for the bottom middle of the page
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for Bottom middle.
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.
Understanding printer menus
192
Menu item
Header/Footer
Bottom right
Bottom right
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Bates number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Enter custom text
Overlay
Off
Confidential
Copy
Draft
Urgent
Custom
Custom Overlay
Allow priority copies
On
Off
Custom Job scanning
On
Off
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Background Removal
-4 to +4
Auto Center
On
Off
Description
Specifies header/footer information for the bottom right of the page
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for Bottom right.
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.
Specifies overlay text that is printed on each page of the copy job
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Specifies custom overlay text
Allows interruption of a print job to copy a page or document
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Lets you copy in a single copy job a document that contains mixed paper sizes
Lets you save custom copy settings as shortcuts
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy
Lets you automatically center the copy on the page
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
193
Menu item
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Mirror Image
On
Off
Negative Image
On
Off
Shadow Detail
0–4
Scan edge to edge
On
Off
Sharpness
0–5
Sample Copy
On
Off
Fax Settings menu
Description
Specifies which color to drop during copies, and how much to increase or decrease the dropout
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Specifies the contrast used for the copy job
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Creates a negative image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to-edge prior to copying
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a copy
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Creates a sample copy of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu
Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job by way of a telephone line.
Understanding printer menus
194
General Fax Settings
Menu item
Fax Cover Page
Fax Cover Page
Off by default
On by default
Never Use
Always Use
Include To field
On
Off
Include From field
On
Off
From
Include Message field
On
Off
Message
Include Logo
On
Off
Include Footer <x>
Footer <x>
Station Name
Station Number
Station ID
Station Name
Station Number
Enable Manual Fax
On
Off
Memory Use
All receive
Mostly receive
Equal
Mostly sent
All send
Description
Configures the fax cover page
Note: Off is the factory default setting for all Fax Cover Page options.
Specifies the name of the fax within the printer
Specifies a number associated with the fax
Specifies how the fax is identified
Sets the printer to fax manually only, which requires a line splitter and a telephone hand set
Notes:
• Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax number.
• Touch # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function.
Defines the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs
Notes:
• “All receive” specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
• “Mostly receive” specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
• Equal is the factory default setting. Equal splits the memory for sending and receiving fax jobs into equal amounts.
• “Mostly sent” specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs.
• “All send” specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs.
Understanding printer menus
195
Menu item
Cancel Faxes
Allow
Don't Allow
Caller ID
FSK
DTMF
Fax number masking
Off
From left
From right
Digits to mask
0–58
Fax Send Settings
Menu item
Resolution
Standard
Fine
Super Fine
Ultra Fine
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Universal
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Business Card
Custom Scan Size <x>
A4
A5
Oficio (Mexico)
A6
JIS B5
Book Original
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Letter/Legal
Description
Specifies whether the printer may cancel fax jobs
Note: If Cancel Faxes is not enabled, it will not appear as an option.
Specifies type of caller ID being used
Note: FSK is the factory default setting.
Specifies the direction from which digits are masked in an outgoing fax number
Note: The number of characters masked is determined by the “Digits to mask” setting.
Specifies the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number
Description
Specifies quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives greater print quality, but it increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
196
Menu item
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Content
Text
Text/Photo
Photograph
Darkness
1–9
Dial Prefix
Dialing Prefix Rules
Prefix Rule <x>
Automatic Redial
0–9
Redial Frequency
1–200
Behind a PABX
Off
On
Enable ECM
On
Off
Enable Fax Scans
On
Off
Driver to fax
On
Off
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Description
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to fax
Notes:
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the documents are mostly text or line art.
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet print.
Lightens or darkens the output
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
A numeric entry field is provided to enter numbers
Establishes a dialing prefix rule
Specifies the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Specifies the number of minutes between redials
Enables switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone
Enables Error Correction Mode for fax jobs
Lets you send faxes by scanning at the printer
Allows driver to fax jobs to be sent by the printer
Lets you save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer
Understanding printer menus
197
Menu item
Dial Mode
Tone
Pulse
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Custom Job scanning
On
Off
Scan Preview
On
Off
Background Removal
-4 to +4
Auto Center
On
Off
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Contrast
Best for content
0–5
Mirror Image
On
Off
Negative Image
On
Off
Description
Specifies the dialing sound, either as a tone or a pulse.
Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent
Lets you scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Lets you automatically center the fax on the page
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Specifies which color to drop during faxing, and how much to increase or decrease the dropout
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Specifies the contrast of the output
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Creates a negative image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
198
Menu item
Shadow Detail
0–4
Scan edge to edge
On
Off
Sharpness
0–5
Enable Color Fax Scans
On by default
Never use
Always use
Off by default
Auto Convert Color Faxes to
Mono Faxes
On
Off
Description
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a fax
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to-edge prior to faxing
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a fax
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Enables color faxing
Note: “Off by default” is the factory default setting.
Converts all outgoing faxes to black and white
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Receive Settings
Menu item
Enable Fax Receive
On
Off
Rings to Answer
1–25
Auto Reduction
On
Off
Paper Source
Auto
Tray <x>
Multi-Purpose Feeder
Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin 1<x>
Sides (Duplex)
On
Off
Fax Footer
On
Off
Description
Allows fax jobs to be received by the printer
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Specifies the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Scales an incoming fax job so it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated fax source
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Specifies the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print an incoming fax
Specifies an output bin for received faxes
Note: Bin 1 is available only when the finisher is installed.
Enables duplex printing (two-sided printing) for incoming fax jobs
Prints the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
199
Menu item
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Fax Forwarding
Forward
Print and Forward
Forward to
Fax
FTP
LDSS eSF
Forward to Shortcut
Block No Name Fax
On
Off
Banned Fax List
Holding Faxes
Held Fax Mode
Off
Always On
Manual
Scheduled
Fax Holding Schedule
Staple
On
Off
Fax Log Settings
Menu item
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Receive Error Log
Print Never
Print on Error
Description
Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received
Enables forwarding of received faxes to another recipient
Specifies the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwarded
Note: This item is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server.
Lets you enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail,
FPT, LDSS, or eSF)
Enables blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID specified
Enables the list of banned fax numbers stored in the printer
Enables fax holding all of the time or according to a set schedule
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Specifies the default staple setting for the attached finisher
Note: Only the settings associated with the installed finisher appear.
Description
Enables printing of a transmission log after each fax job
Enables printing of a receive error log following a receive error
Understanding printer menus
200
Menu item
Auto Print Logs
On
Off
Log Paper Source
Tray <x>
Manual Feeder
Logs Display
Remote Station Name
Dialed Number
Enable Job Log
On
Off
Enable Call Log
On
Off
Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin <x>
Speaker Settings
Menu item
Speaker Mode
Always Off
On until Connected
Always On
Speaker Volume
High
Low
Ringer Volume
On
Off
Distinctive Rings
Menu item
Single Ring
On
Off
Description
Enables automatic printing of fax logs
Note: Logs print after every 200 jobs.
Selects the source of the paper used for printing logs
Specifies whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name returned
Enables access to the Fax Job log
Enables access to the Fax Call log
Specifies the output bin where fax logs are printed
Description
Notes:
• Always Off turns the speaker off.
• On until Connected is the factory default setting. The speaker is on and issues a noise until the fax connection is made.
• Always On turns the speaker on.
Controls the volume setting
Note: High is the factory default setting.
Controls the fax speaker ringer volume
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Description
Answers calls with a one-ring pattern
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
201
Menu item
Double Ring
On
Off
Triple Ring
On
Off
Description
Answers calls with a double-ring pattern
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Answers calls with a triple-ring pattern
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) menu
Fax Server mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission.
Fax Server Setup
Menu item
To Format
Reply Address
Subject
Message
Primary SMTP Gateway
Description
Lets you enter the information using the virtual keyboard on the printer touch screen
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Specifies SMTP server port information
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
Specifies SMTP server port information
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
Specifies the image type for scan to fax Image Format
PDF (.pdf)
XPS (.xps)
TIFF (.tif)
Content
Text
Text/Photo
Photograph
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to fax
Notes:
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the documents are mostly text or line art.
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet print.
Specifies the resolution level for scan to fax Fax Resolution
Standard
Fine
Super Fine
Ultra Fine
Darkness
1–9
Lightens or darkens the output
Note: 5 factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
202
Menu item
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Universal
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Business Card
Custom Scan Size <x>
A4
A5
Oficio (Mexico)
A6
JIS B5
Book Original
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Letter/Legal
Use Multi-Page TIFF
On
Off
Description
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan to fax job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Enables analog fax receive
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Enable Analog Receive
On
Off
E-mail Settings menu
Menu item
E-mail Server Setup
Subject
Message
Description
Specifies e-mail server information
Note: The message box has a limitation of 512 characters.
Understanding printer menus
203
Menu item
E-mail Server Setup
Send me a copy
Never appears
On by default
Off by default
Always On
E-mail Server Setup
Max e-mail size
0–65535 KB
E-mail Server Setup
Size Error Message
E-mail Server Setup
Limit destinations
Description
Sends a copy of the e-mail back to the creator of the e-mail
Specifies the maximum e-mail size in kilobytes
Note: E-mail above the specified size is not sent.
Sends a message when an e-mail is greater than the configured size limit
Sends an e-mail only when the address contains the domain name, such as a company domain name
Notes:
• E-mail can only be sent to the specified domain.
• The limit is one domain.
Defines the path name
Note: Defines the path. For example: /directory/path
The following characters or symbols are invalid entries for a path name: * : ? <
> | .
E-mail Server Setup
Web Link Setup
Server
Login
Password
Path
Base file name
Web Link
Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
PDF Version
1.2–1.6
Content
Text/Photo
Photograph
Text
Specifies the format of the file
Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned to e-mail
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to e-mail
Notes:
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the documents are mostly text or line art.
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet print.
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.
Understanding printer menus
204
Menu item
Color
Gray
Color
Resolution
75
150
200
300
400
600
Darkness
1–9
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Universal
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Business Card
Custom Scan Size <x>
A4
A5
Oficio (Mexico)
A6
JIS B5
Book Original
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Letter/Legal
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Description
Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or color
Note: Gray is the factory default setting.
Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Lightens or darkens the output
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).
Understanding printer menus
205
Menu item
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
E-mail images sent as
Attachment
Web Link
Use Multi-Page TIFF
On
Off
Description
Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image
Notes:
• “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Specifies how the images will be sent
Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan to e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Specifies whether the transmission log prints
Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.
Specifies a paper source for printing e-mail logs
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Log Paper Source
Tray <x>
Manual Feeder
Manual Env
MP Feeder
Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin <x>
E-mail Bit Depth
8 bit
1 bit
Custom Job scanning
On
Off
Scan Preview
On
Off
Specifies an output bin for the printed e-mail log
Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images when
Color is set to Off.
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
206
Menu item
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Background Removal
-4 to +4
Auto Center
On
Off
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Mirror Image
On
Off
Negative Image
On
Off
Shadow Detail
0–4
Scan edge to edge
On
Off
Sharpness
0–5
Use cc:/bcc:
On
Off
Description
Lets you save e-mail addresses as shortcuts
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the E-mail
Destination screen.
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a scanned image
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Lets you automatically center the copy on the page
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease the dropout
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Specifies the contrast of the output
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Creates a negative image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Enables the use of the cc: and bcc: fields
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
207
Color
Gray
Color
Resolution
75
150
200
300
400
600
Darkness
1–9
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
FTP Settings menu
Menu item
Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
PDF Version
1.2–1.6
Content
Text/Photo
Photograph
Text
Description
Specifies the format of the FTP file
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
Sets the version level of the PDF file for FTP
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to FTP
Notes:
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the documents are mostly text or line art.
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet print
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.
Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or color
Note: Gray is the factory default setting.
Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Lightens or darkens the output
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
208
Menu item
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Universal
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Business Card
Custom Scan Size <x>
A4
A5
Oficio (Mexico)
A6
JIS B5
Book Original
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Letter/Legal
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Description
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Use Multi-Page TIFF
On
Off
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).
Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image
Notes:
• “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan to FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Understanding printer menus
209
Menu item
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Log Paper Source
Tray <x>
Manual Feeder
Manual Env
MP Feeder
Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin <x>
FTP bit Depth
8 bit
1 bit
Base File Name
Custom Job Scanning
On
Off
Scan Preview
On
Off
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Background Removal
-4 to +4
Auto Center
On
Off
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Description
Specifies whether the transmission log prints
Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.
Specifies a paper source for FTP logs
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Specifies an output bin for the FTP log
Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images when
Color is set to Off
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Lets you enter a base file name
Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Enables shortcut creation for FTP addresses
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Lets you automatically center the copy on the page
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease the dropout
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Understanding printer menus
210
Menu item
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Mirror Image
On
Off
Negative Image
On
Off
Shadow Detail
0–4
Scan edge to edge
On
Off
Sharpness
0–5
Flash Drive menu
Scan Settings
Menu item
Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
PDF Version
1.2–1.6
Content
Text/Photo
Photograph
Text
Color
Gray
Color
Description
Specifies the contrast of the output
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Creates a negative image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Description
Specifies the format of the file
Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned to USB
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to USB
Notes:
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the documents are mostly text or line art.
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet print
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.
Specifies whether job prints in grayscale or color
Note: Gray is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
211
Menu item
Resolution
75
150
200
300
400
600
Darkness
1–9
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Universal
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Business Card
Custom Scan Size <x>
A4
A5
Oficio (Mexico)
A6
JIS B5
Book Original
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Letter/Legal
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Description
Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Lightens or darkens the output
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).
Understanding printer menus
212
Menu item
Photo JPEG Quality
5–90
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Use Multi-Page TIFF
On
Off
Scan bit Depth
8 bit
1 bit
Base File Name
Custom Job scanning
Off
On
Scan Preview
On
Off
Background Removal
-4 to +4
Auto Center
On
Off
Description
Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image
Notes:
• 50 is the factory default setting.
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Sets the quality of a JPEG text or text/photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.
Notes:
• “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
• This menu item applies to Text, Text/Photo, and all scan functions.
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan to USB job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images when
Color is set to Off
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Lets you enter a base file name
Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Lets you automatically center the copy on the page
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
213
Menu item
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Mirror Image
On
Off
Negative Image
On
Off
Shadow Detail
0–4
Scan edge to edge
On
Off
Sharpness
0–5
Print Settings
Menu item
Copies
Paper Source
Tray <x>
MP Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Collate
Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)
Description
Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease the dropout
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Specifies the contrast of the output
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Creates a negative image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Description
Specifies the number of copies to print
Specifies the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print from the flash drive
Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. No pages will be collated.
• The On setting stacks the print job sequentially.
Understanding printer menus
214
Menu item
Sides (Duplex)
On
Off
Staple
On
Off
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Orientation
Auto
Portrait
Landscape
N-up (pages/side)
Off
2 Up
3 Up
4 Up
6 Up
9 Up
12 Up
16 Up
N-up Border
None
Solid
N-up Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Separator Sheets
None
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Description
Enables duplex printing (two-sided printing)
Enables stapling
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page
Notes:
• Long Edge is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge specifies that binding be placed on the left edge of portrait pages and the top edge of landscape pages.
• Short Edge specifies that binding be placed on the top edge of portrait pages and the left edge of landscape pages.
Specifies the orientation of the print job
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Specifies that multiple-page images be printed on one side of a sheet of paper.
This is also referred to as Paper Saver.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.
Prints a border around each page image when using N-up
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Specifies the positioning of multiple-page images when using N-up
Notes:
• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of images and whether the images are in portrait or landscape orientation.
Places a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs based on the value selected
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
215
Menu item
Separator Source
Tray <x>
Manual Feeder
Envelope Feeder
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print Settings
Setup menu
Menu item
Printer Language
PCL Emulation
PS Emulation
Description
Specifies a paper source
Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Job Waiting
On
Off
Description
Sets the default printer language
Notes:
• PCL emulation uses a PCL interpreter for processing print jobs. PostScript emulation uses a PS interpreter for processing print jobs.
• PCL is the factory default printer language.
• Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a software program from sending print jobs that use another printer language.
Specifies that print jobs be removed from the print queue if they require unavailable printer options or custom settings. They are stored in a separate print queue, so other jobs print normally.
When the missing information and/or options are obtained, the stored jobs print.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu appears only if a non-Read Only printer hard disk is installed. This requirement ensures that stored jobs are not deleted if the printer loses power.
Understanding printer menus
216
Menu item
Print Area
Normal
Whole Page
Download Target
RAM
Flash
Disk
Job Accounting
On
Off
Description
Sets the logical and physical printable area
Notes:
• This menu does not appear if Edge to Edge is enabled in the printer Setup menu.
• Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to print data in the non-printable area defined by the Normal setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.
• The Whole Page setting allows the image to be moved into the non-printable area defined by the Normal setting, but the printer will clip the image at the Normal setting boundary.
• The Whole Page setting only affects pages printed using a
PCL 5e interpreter. This setting has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter.
Sets the storage location for downloads
Notes:
• RAM is the factory default setting.
• Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk places them in permanent storage. Downloads remain in flash memory or on the printer hard disk even when the printer is turned off.
• Storing downloads in RAM is temporary.
• This menu appears only if a flash and/or disk option is installed.
Specifies whether the printer stores statistical information about the most recent print jobs on the hard disk
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. Off means the printer does not store job statistics.
• The statistics include a record of print errors, the print time, the job size in bytes, the requested paper size and type, the total number of printed pages, and the total number of copies requested.
• Job Accounting is available only when a printer hard disk is installed and working properly. It should not be Read/Write or Write protected. Job Buffer Size should not be set to 100%.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to reset. The menu selection is updated.
Understanding printer menus
217
Menu item
Resource Save
On
Off
Print All Order
Alphabetically
Newest First
Oldest First
Finishing menu
Menu item
Sides (Duplex)
2 sided
1 sided
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Copies
1–999
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Description
Specifies how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as fonts and macros stored in RAM, when the printer receives a job that requires more memory than is available
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. Off sets the printer to retain the downloads only until memory is needed. Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs.
• The On setting retains the downloads during language changes and printer resets. If the printer runs out of memory,
38 Memory Full appears, and downloads are not deleted.
Specifies the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed when Print All is selected
Notes:
• Alphabetically is the factory default setting.
• Print jobs always appear in alphabetical order on the printer control panel.
Description
Specifies whether duplex (2-sided) printing is set as the default for all print jobs
Notes:
• 1 sided is the factory default setting.
• To set 2-sided printing from the software program: for Windows users, click
File ª Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup; for
Macintosh users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the
Print dialog and pop-up menus.
Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page
Notes:
• Long Edge is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge specifies that binding be placed on the left edge of portrait pages and the top edge of landscape pages.
• Short Edge specifies that binding be placed on the top edge of portrait pages and the left edge of landscape pages.
Specifies a default number of copies for each print job
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
218
Menu item
Collate
Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)
Separator Sheets
None
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Separator Source
Tray <x>
Multi-Purpose Feeder
Envelope Feeder
N-up (pages-side)
Off
2-Up
3-Up
4-Up
6-Up
9-Up
12-Up
16-Up
N-up Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Description
Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. No pages will be collated.
• The On setting stacks the print job sequentially.
• Both settings print the entire job the number of times specified by the Copies menu setting.
Specifies whether blank separator sheets are inserted
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting.
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collation is set to On. If Collation is set to Off, a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.
• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This setting is useful when printing transparencies or inserting blank pages in a document for notes.
Specifies the paper source for separator sheets
Notes:
• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for
Multi-Purpose Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
Specifies that multiple-page images be printed on one side of a sheet of paper
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.
Specifies the positioning of multiple-page images when using N-up (pages-sides)
Notes:
• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of images and whether the images are in portrait or landscape orientation.
Specifies the orientation of a multiple-page sheet
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and landscape.
Understanding printer menus
219
Menu item
N-up Border
None
Solid
Staple Job
Off
On
Offset Pages
Off
Between Jobs
Between Copies
Quality menu
Menu item
Print Resolution
300 dpi
600 dpi
1200 dpi
1200 Image Q
2400 Image Q
Pixel Boost
Off
Fonts
Horizontally
Vertically
Both Directions
Toner Darkness
1–10
Description
Prints a border around each page image when using N-up (pages-sides)
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Specifies whether print jobs are stapled
Notes:
• This menu item is available only when the StapleSmart Finisher is installed.
• Off is the factory default setting. Print jobs are not stapled.
• Envelopes are not stapled.
Stacks copies or print jobs into staggered sets in an output bin
Notes:
• This menu item appears only when the StapleSmart Finisher is installed.
• Off is the factory default setting. No pages are offset during the print job.
• Between Jobs offsets each print job.
• Between Copies offsets each copy of a print job.
Description
Specifies the printed output resolution
Note: 600 dpi is the factory default setting. The printer driver default is 1200 IQ.
Enhances the printed quality of small fonts and graphics
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Fonts applies this setting only to text.
• Horizontally darkens horizontal lines of text and images.
• Vertically darkens vertical lines of text and images.
• Both Directions darkens horizontal and vertical lines on text and images.
Lightens or darkens the printed output
Notes:
• 8 is the factory default setting.
• Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.
Understanding printer menus
220
Menu item
Enhance Fine Lines
On
Off
Gray Correction
Auto
Off
Brightness
-6 to +6
Contrast
0–5
Description
Enables a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical circuit diagrams, and flow charts
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• To set Enhance Fine Lines using the Embedded Web Server, type the network printer IP address in a browser window.
Adjusts the gray value of printed output
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Adjusts or darkens printed output and conserves toner
Notes:
• 0 is the factory default setting.
• A negative value will darken text, images, and graphics. A positive value will lighten them and conserve toner.
Adjusts the degree of difference between levels of gray in printed output
Notes:
• 0 is the factory default setting.
• Higher settings show more difference between levels of gray.
Utilities menu
Menu item
Remove Held Jobs
Confidential
Held
Not Restored
All
Format Flash
Yes
No
Description
Removes confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk
Notes:
• Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.
Bookmarks, jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are not affected.
• Selecting Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that were not restored from the disk.
Formats the flash memory. Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory option card in the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is formatting.
Notes:
• A flash memory option card must be installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be available. The flash memory option card must not be Read/Write or Write protected.
• Selecting Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.
• No cancels the format request.
Understanding printer menus
221
Menu item
Delete Downloads on Disk
Delete Now
Do Not Delete
Job Acct Stat
Clear
Hex Trace
Activate
Coverage Estimator
Off
On
LCD Contrast
1–10
LCD Brightness
1–10
Description
Removes downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held Jobs, buffered jobs, and parked jobs. Job accounting information is not affected.
Note: Delete Now is the default setting.
Prints a list of all stored job statistics or deletes the information from the printer hard disk
Notes:
• A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be available.
• Selecting Print prints a list of statistics.
• Clear deletes all job statistics stored on the printer hard disk.
• The Clear selection will not appear if Job Accounting is set to MarkTrack
NPA.
TM using
Assists in isolating the source of a print job problem
Notes:
• When Activate is selected, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation and control codes are not executed.
• To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn the printer off or reset the printer.
Provides an estimate of the percentage coverage of black on a page. The estimate is printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjusts the contrast lighting of the display
Notes:
• 5 is the factory default setting.
• A higher setting makes the display appear lighter.
• A lower setting makes the display appear darker.
Adjusts the brightness of the backlight on the display
Notes:
• 5 is the factory default setting.
• A higher setting makes the display appear lighter.
• A lower setting makes the display appear darker.
PDF menu
Menu item
Scale to Fit
Yes
No
Annotations
Do Not Print
Description
Scales page content to fit the selected paper size
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Prints annotations in a PDF
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
222
PostScript menu
Menu item
Print PS Error
On
Off
Font Priority
Resident
Flash/Disk
PCL Emul menu
Menu item
Font Source
Resident
Disk
Download
Flash
All
Font Name
<list of available fonts>
Symbol Set
10U PC-8
12U PC-850
Description
Prints a page containing the PostScript error
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Establishes the font search order
Notes:
• Resident is the factory default setting.
• A formatted flash memory option card or printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be available.
• The flash memory option or printer hard disk cannot be Read/Write, Write, or password protected.
• Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.
Description
Specifies the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu item
Notes:
• Resident is the factory default setting. It shows the factory default set of fonts downloaded into printer RAM.
• Flash and Disk settings appear only if applicable and show all fonts resident in that option.
• Flash and Disk options must be properly formatted and cannot be
Read/Write, Write, or password protected.
• Download appears only if applicable and shows all the fonts downloaded into printer RAM.
• All shows all fonts available to any option.
Identifies a specific font and the option where it is stored
Notes:
• Courier 10 is the factory default setting.
• The font source abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, K for Disk, and
D for download.
Specifies the symbol set for each font name
Notes:
• 10U PC-8 is the US factory default setting.
• 12U PC-850 is the international factory default setting.
• A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters, punctuation, and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the supported symbol sets are shown.
Understanding printer menus
223
Menu item
PCL Emulation Settings
Pitch
0.08–100
PCL Emulation Settings
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
PCL Emulation Settings
Lines per Page
1–255
PCL Emulation Settings
A4 Width
198 mm
203 mm
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto CR after LF
On
Off
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto LF after CR
On
Off
Description
Specifies the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts
Notes:
• 10 is the factory default setting.
• Pitch refers to the number of fixed-space characters per inch (cpi).
• Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01-cpi increments.
• For nonscalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but cannot be changed.
Specifies the orientation of text and graphics on the page
Notes:
• Portrait is the factory default setting.
• Portrait prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page.
• Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.
Specifies the number of lines that print on each page
Notes:
• 60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default setting.
• The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the desired Paper
Size and Orientation before setting Lines per Page.
Sets the printer to print on A4-size paper
Notes:
• 198 mm is the factory default setting.
• The 203-mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of eighty 10-pitch characters.
Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return after a line feed control command
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a line feed after a carriage return control command
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
224
Menu item
Tray Renumber
Assign MP Feeder
Off
None
0–199
Assign Tray <x>
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Paper
Off
None
0–199
Assign Man Env
Off
None
0–199
Tray Renumber
View Factory Def
MPF Default = 8
T1 Default = 1
T2 Default = 4
T3 Default = 5
T4 Default = 20
T5 Default = 21
Env Default = 6
MPaper Default = 2
MEnv Default = 3
Tray Renumber
Restore Defaults
Yes
No
Description
Configures the printer to work with printer software or programs that use different source assignments for trays, drawers, and feeders
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• None is not an available selection. It appears only when it is selected by the PCL 5 interpreter.
• None ignores the Select Paper Feed command.
• 0–199 allows a custom setting to be assigned.
Lets you view the factory default setting assigned to each tray, drawer, or feeder, even if it has not been installed
Returns all tray, drawer, and feeder assignments to the factory default settings
Understanding printer menus
225
HTML menu
Menu item
Font Name
Albertus MT
Antique Olive
Apple Chancery
Arial MT
Avant Garde
Bodoni
Bookman
Chicago
Clarendon
Cooper Black
Copperplate
Coronet
Courier
Eurostile
Garamond
Geneva
Gill Sans
Goudy
Helvetica
Hoefler Text
Menu item
Font Size
1–255 pt
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Intl Univers
Joanna MT
Letter Gothic
Lubalin Gothic
Marigold
MonaLisa Recut
Monaco
New CenturySbk
New York
Optima
Oxford
Palatino
StempelGaramond
Taffy
Times
TimesNewRoman
Univers
Zapf Chancery
Description
Sets the default font for HTML documents
Notes:
• The Times font will be used in HTML documents that do not specify a font.
• The following fonts appear only if the appropriate DBCS font card is installed: HG-GothicB, MSung-Light, MD_DotumChe, and MingMT-
Light.
Scale
1–400%
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Margin Size
8–255 mm
Description
Sets the default font size for HTML documents
Notes:
• 12 pt is the factory default setting.
• Font size can be increased in 1-point increments.
Scales the default font for HTML documents
Notes:
• 100% is the factory default setting.
• Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
Sets the page orientation for HTML documents
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Sets the page margin for HTML documents
Notes:
• 19 mm is the factory default setting.
• Margin size can be increased in 1-mm increments.
Understanding printer menus
226
Menu item
Backgrounds
Do Not Print
Image menu
Menu item
Auto Fit
On
Off
Invert
On
Off
Scaling
Anchor Top Left
Best Fit
Anchor Center
Fit Height/Width
Fit Height
Fit Width
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Rev Portrait
Rev Landscape
XPS menu
Menu item
Print Error Pages
Off
On
Description
Specifies whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Description
Selects the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• The On setting overrides scaling and orientation settings for some images.
Inverts bi-tonal monochrome images
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The font size can be increased in 1-point increments.
• This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
Scales the image to fit the selected paper size
Notes:
• Best Fit is the factory default setting.
• When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.
Sets the image orientation
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Description
Prints a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
227
Help menu
The Help menu consists of Help pages that are stored in the printer as PDFs. They contain reference information about using the printer and performing tasks. You may select to print each one individually, or select Print all guides to print all of them at one time.
English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the printer. Other translations are available on the
Software and Documentation CD.
Menu item
Print all guides
Copy guide
E-mail guide
Fax guide
FTP guide
Information guide
Print defects guide
Description
Prints all the guides
Provides information about making copies and changing settings
Provides information about sending e-mails using addresses, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and changing settings
Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and changing settings
Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using an FTP address, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and changing settings
Provides help in locating additional information
Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints
Understanding printer menus
228
Understanding printer messages
List of status and error messages
Answering
The printer is answering a fax call. Wait for the message to clear.
Busy
Wait for the message to clear.
Call complete
A fax call is completed. Wait for the message to clear.
Change <src> to <x>
<src> is a tray or feeder, and <x> is a paper size or type.
You can change the current paper source for the remainder of the print job. The formatted page will print on the paper loaded in the selected tray. This may cause clipping of text or images. Try one or more of the following:
• Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type.
• Touch Use current [src] to ignore the message and print from the tray selected for the print job.
• Touch Continue to continue the job if the correct size and type are loaded in the tray, and this size and type are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu.
Note: If you touch Continue when there is no paper in the tray, the job is not continued.
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the current job.
Check tray <x> connection
Try one or more of the following:
• Turn the printer off and then back on.
If the error occurs a second time:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the tray.
4 Reattach the tray.
5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
6 Restart the printer.
Understanding printer messages
229
If the error occurs again:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the tray.
4 Contact Customer Support.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the tray.
Close door or insert cartridge
The cartridge is missing or not installed correctly. Insert the cartridge and close all doors and covers.
Close finisher side door
Close the side door on the finisher.
Connect <x>bps
The fax is connected. Wait for the message to clear.
Note: <x> is the baud rate per second.
Dialing
A fax number is dialed. If the number is too long to fit on the screen, only the word Dialing appears. Wait for the message to clear.
Disk corrupted
The printer attempted a hard disk recovery on a corrupted hard disk, and the hard disk cannot be repaired. The hard disk must be reformatted.
Touch Reformat disk to reformat the hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Reformatting the disk deletes all the files currently stored on the disk.
Disk Full - Scan Job Canceled
The scan job canceled or stopped due to insufficient printer hard disk space.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
Fax failed
The fax failed to be sent. Wait for the message to clear.
Understanding printer messages
230
Fax memory full
There is not enough memory to send the fax job.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.
The fax partition appears to be corrupted. Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
• Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer. If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.
Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.
The printer is in Fax Server mode, but the Fax Server setup has not been completed.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Fax Server setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.
Fax Station Name not set up
The Fax Station Name has not been entered. Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Analog Fax Setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.
Fax Station Number not set up
The Fax Station Number has not been entered. Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Analog Fax Setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.
Flushing buffer
Wait for the message to clear.
Insert staple cartridge
Try one or more of the following:
• Insert a staple cartridge to clear the message.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the staple feature.
Understanding printer messages
231
Insert Tray <x>
Insert the specified tray into the printer.
Install bin <x>
Try one or more of the following:
• Install the specified bin:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Install the specified bin.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Restart the printer.
• Cancel the current job.
Install envelope feeder
Try one or more of the following:
• Install the envelope feeder:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Install the envelope feeder.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Restart the printer.
• Cancel the current job.
Install Tray <x>
Try one or more of the following:
• Install the specified tray:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Install the specified tray.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Restart the printer.
• Cancel the current job.
Invalid PIN
Enter a valid PIN.
Understanding printer messages
232
Job stored for delayed transmission
The scanning completed for a delayed send fax job. Wait for the message to clear.
Line busy
A fax number is dialed, but the fax line is busy. Wait for the message to clear.
Load <src> with <x>
<src> is a tray or feeder, and <x> is a paper type or size.
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified paper in the tray.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, it prints from the default source.
• Cancel the current job.
Load manual feeder with <x>
<x> is a paper type or size.
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified paper in the multipurpose feeder.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default source.
• Cancel the current job.
Load staples
Try one or more of the following:
• Replace the specified staple cartridge in the finisher.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Memory full, cannot print faxes
There is not enough memory to print the fax job.
Touch Continue to clear the message without printing. Held faxes will attempt to print after the printer has been restarted.
Network/Network <x>
The printer is connected to the network.
Understanding printer messages
233
Network indicates that the printer is using the standard network port built into the printer system board. Network
<x> indicates that an internal print server is installed inside the printer or that the printer is connected to an external print server.
No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.
The printer is not detecting an analog phone line, so the fax is disabled. Connect the printer to an analog phone line.
No answer
A fax number is dialed, but no connection is made. Wait for the message to clear.
No dial tone
The printer does not have a dial tone. Wait for the message to clear.
Queued for sending
The scanning process of a fax job completed, but the job is not sent yet because another fax job is being sent or received. Wait for the message to clear.
Ready
The printer is ready to receive print jobs.
Reattach bin <x>
Try one or more of the following:
• Turn the printer off and then back on.
If the error occurs a second time:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the specified bin.
4 Reattach the bin.
5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
6 Restart the printer.
If the error occurs again:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the specified bin.
4 Contact Customer Support.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the specified bin.
Understanding printer messages
234
Reattach bin <x> – <y>
Try one or more of the following:
• Turn the printer off and then back on.
If the error occurs a second time:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the specified bins.
4 Reattach the bins.
5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
6 Restart the printer.
If the error occurs again:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the specified bins.
4 Contact Customer Support.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the specified bins.
Reattach envelope feeder
Try one or more of the following:
• Turn the printer off and then back on.
If the error occurs a second time:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the envelope feeder.
4 Reattach the envelope feeder.
5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
6 Restart the printer.
If the error occurs again:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the envelope feeder.
4 Contact Customer Support.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the envelope feeder.
Receive complete
The printer has received an entire fax job. Wait for the message to clear.
Understanding printer messages
235
Receiving page <n>
The printer receives page <n> of the fax job, where <n> is the number of the page received. Wait for the message to clear.
Remove packaging material, check <x>
Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location.
Remove paper from <linked bin set name>
Remove the paper from the specified bin. The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing.
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.
Remove paper from all bins
Remove the paper from all of the bins. The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing.
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.
Remove paper from bin <x>
Remove the paper from the specified bin. The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing.
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.
Remove paper from standard output bin
Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin.
Replace <x> if restarting job.
One or more messages which interrupted a scan job are now cleared. Replace the original documents in the scanner to restart the scan job. <x> is a page of the scan job.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Cancel Job if a scan job is processing when the message appears. This cancels the job and clears the message.
• Touch Scan from Automatic Document Feeder if the page jam recovery is active. Scanning resumes from the
ADF immediately after the last successfully scanned page.
• Touch Scan from flatbed if page jam recovery is active. Scanning resumes from the scanner glass immediately after the last successfully scanned page.
• Touch Finish job without further scanning if page jam recovery is active. The job ends at the last successfully scanned page, but the job is not canceled. Successfully scanned pages go to their destination: copy, fax, e-mail, or FTP.
• Touch Restart job if job recovery is active. The message clears. A new scan job containing the same parameters as the previous job starts.
Understanding printer messages
236
Replace wiper
Replace the fuser wiper, or try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Touch Ignore to clear the message, but at the next power-on, the message appears again.
Restore Held Jobs?
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to restore all held jobs stored on the printer hard disk.
• Touch Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored.
Scan Document Too Long
The scan job exceeds the maximum number of pages. Touch Cancel Job to clear the message.
Scanner ADF Cover Open
The ADF cover is open. The message clears when the cover is closed.
Scanner Jam Access Cover Open
Close the bottom ADF door to clear the message.
Securely clearing disk space
The printer hard disk wiping process needs to recover. The message clears when all blocks are cleared.
Sending page <n>
The printer sends page <n> of the fax job, where <n> is the number of the page sent. Wait for the message to clear.
Serial <x>
The printer is using a serial cable connection. The serial port is the active communication link.
Set clock
The clock is not set. This message appears if no other fax status message appears. It remains until the clock is set.
SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator.
An error occurred on the SMTP server, or the SMTP server is not configured properly. Touch Continue to clear the message. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.
Understanding printer messages
237
Some held jobs were not restored
Touch Continue to delete the specified job.
Note: Some held jobs are not restored. They stay on the hard disk and are inaccessible.
System busy, preparing resources for job.
Not all resources needed for the job are available. Wait for the message to clear.
System busy, preparing resources for job. Deleting held job(s).
Not all resources needed for the job are available. Some held jobs are deleted to free system memory. Wait for the message to clear.
Unsupported disk
An unsupported printer hard disk has been installed. Remove the unsupported device, and then install a supported one.
Unsupported USB device, please remove
Remove the unrecognized USB device.
Unsupported USB hub, please remove
Remove the unrecognized USB hub.
USB/USB <x>
The printer is using a USB cable connection. The USB port is the active communication link.
Waiting for redial
The printer is waiting to redial the fax number. Wait for the message to clear.
30 Invalid refill, change cartridge
Remove the print cartridge, and then install a supported one.
31 Replace defective cartridge
Remove the defective print cartridge, and then install a new one.
32 Cartridge part number unsupported by device
Remove the print cartridge, and then install a supported one.
Understanding printer messages
238
34 Short paper
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the appropriate paper or other specialty media in the proper tray.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and print the job using a different paper tray.
• Check tray length and width guides and make sure the paper is properly loaded in the tray.
• Check the Print Properties or Print dialog settings to make sure the print job is requesting the correct paper size and type.
• Check that the paper size is correctly set. For example, if the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, make sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed.
• Cancel the current print job.
35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to disable Resource Save and continue printing.
• To enable Resource Save after receiving this message, make sure the link buffers are set to Auto, and then exit the menus to activate the link buffer changes. When Ready appears, enable Resource Save.
• Install additional memory.
37 Insufficient memory to collate job
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to print the portion of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job.
• Cancel the current print job.
37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data in printer memory.
• Install additional printer memory.
37 Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted
The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
37 Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored
The printer was unable to restore some or all of the confidential or held jobs on the printer hard disk.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
Understanding printer messages
239
38 Memory full
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
• Cancel the current print job.
• Install additional printer memory.
39 Complex page, some data may not have printed
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.
• Install additional printer memory.
3
4
1
2
9
42.xy Cartridge region mismatch
Install a print cartridge that matches the region number of the printer. x indicates the value of the printer region. y indicates the value of the cartridge region. x and y can have the following values:
US
Europe, the Middle East, and Africa
Asia
Latin America
Invalid region
50 PPDS font error
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• The printer cannot find a requested font. From the PPDS menu, select Best Fit, and then select On. The printer will find a similar font and reformat the affected text.
• Cancel the current print job.
51 Defective flash detected
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.
Understanding printer messages
240
52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in flash memory.
• Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card.
53 Unformatted flash detected
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing.
• Format the flash memory. If the error message remains, the flash memory may be defective and require replacing.
54 Network <x> software error
<x> is the number of the network connection.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer.
• Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer or print server.
54 Serial option <x> error
<x> is the number of the serial option.
Try one or more of the following:
• Check that the serial cable is connected correctly and is the proper one for the serial port.
• Check that the serial interface parameters (protocol, baud, parity, and data bits) are set correctly on the printer and host computer.
• Touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn the printer power off and then back on to reset the printer.
54 Standard network software error
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer.
• Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer or print server.
Understanding printer messages
241
55 Unsupported option in slot <x>
<x> is a slot on the printer system board.
Try one or more of the following:
1 Turn the printer power off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer system board.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer power back on.
56 Parallel port <x> disabled
<x> is the number of the parallel port.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.
• Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
56 Serial port <x> disabled
<x> is the number of the serial port.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the serial port.
• Make sure the Serial Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
56 Standard parallel port disabled
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.
• Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
56 Standard USB port disabled
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
Understanding printer messages
242
56 USB port <x> disabled
<x> is the number of the USB port.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
57 Configuration change, held jobs were not restored
Since the time the jobs were stored on the printer hard disk something has changed in the printer to invalidate the held jobs. Possible changes include:
• The printer firmware has been updated.
• Paper input, output, or duplex options needed for the print job were removed.
• The print job was created using data from a device in the USB port and the device is no longer in the port.
• The printer hard disk contains jobs that were stored while installed in a different printer model.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
58 Too many bins attached
1 Turn the printer power off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the additional bins.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer power back on.
58 Too many disks installed
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the extra disks.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
58 Too many flash options installed
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the excess flash memory.
Understanding printer messages
243
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
58 Too many trays attached
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the additional trays.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
59 Incompatible envelope feeder
Try one or more of the following:
• Remove the envelope feeder.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the envelope feeder.
59 Incompatible output bin <x>
Try one or more of the following:
• Remove the specified output bin.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified output bin.
59 Incompatible tray <x>
Try one or more of the following:
• Remove the specified tray.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified tray.
61 Remove defective disk
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Install a different printer hard disk before performing any operations that require a printer hard disk.
62 Disk full
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.
• Install a larger printer hard disk.
Understanding printer messages
244
63 Unformatted disk
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Format the printer hard disk.
If the error message remains, the hard disk may be defective and require replacing.
80 Routine maintenance needed
The printer needs to have routine maintenance done. Order a maintenance kit, which contains all the items necessary to replace the pick rollers, the charge roll, the transfer roller, and the fuser.
88 Cartridge low
The toner is low. Replace the print cartridge, and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
88.yy Cartridge nearly low
The toner is low. Replace the print cartridge, and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
88.yy Replace cartridge
The print cartridge is empty.
1 Replace the print cartridge.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message.
200–282.yy paper jam
1 Clear the paper path.
2 Touch Continue to continue printing.
283 Staple jam
1 Clear the jam from the specified stapler area(s).
2 Touch Continue to continue printing.
290-294.yy scanner jam
Clear all original documents from the scanner.
293 Replace all originals if restarting job.
The scanner was instructed to scan using the ADF but there is no paper in the ADF. Load paper in the ADF.
Understanding printer messages
245
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue if no scan job is active when the attendance message appears. This clears the message.
• Touch Cancel Job if a scan job is processing when the attendance message appears. This cancels the job and clears the message.
• Touch Scan from Automatic Document Feeder if the page jam recovery is active. Scanning resumes from the
ADF immediately after the last successfully scanned page.
• Touch Scan from flatbed if page jam recovery is active. Scanning resumes from the flatbed immediately after the last successfully scanned page.
• Touch Finish job without further scanning if page jam recovery is active. The job ends at the last successfully scanned page, but the job is not canceled. Successfully scanned pages go to their destination: copy, fax, e-mail, or FTP.
• Touch Restart job if job recovery is active and you are able to restart the job. The message clears. A new scan job containing the same parameters as the previous job starts.
293.02 Flatbed Cover Open
Close the scanner cover.
840.01 Scanner Disabled
This message indicates that the scanner has been disabled by the system support person.
841-846 Scanner Service Error
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Check all cable connections.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
If the service message appears again, then contact Customer Support, and report the message.
900–999 Service <message>
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Check all cable connections.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
If the service message appears again, contact Customer Support, and report the message.
Understanding printer messages
246
1565 Emulation error, load emulation option
The printer automatically clears the message in 30 seconds and then disables the download emulator on the firmware card.
Understanding printer messages
247
Maintaining the printer
Periodically, certain tasks are required to maintain optimum print quality.
Cleaning the exterior of the printer
1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding.
2 Remove paper from the standard exit bin.
3 Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of the printer.
4 Wipe only the outside of the printer, making sure to include the standard exit bin.
Warning—Potential Damage: Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer.
5 Make sure the paper support and standard exit bin are dry before beginning a new print job.
Cleaning the scanner glass
Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.
1 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2 Open the scanner cover.
3 Wipe the scanner glass until it is clean and dry.
Maintaining the printer
248
4 Wipe the white underside of the scanner cover until it is clean and dry.
5 Open the bottom ADF door.
6 Wipe the ADF scanner glass under the ADF door.
7 Close the bottom ADF door.
8 Wipe the scanner glass (flatbed) and backing material by moving the cloth or paper towel from side to side.
9 Close the scanner cover.
Adjusting scanner registration
Scanner Registration is a process to align the scan area with the paper location. To manually adjust the scanner registration:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Clean the scanner glass and backing material.
3 Hold down and while turning the printer on.
4 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears.
5 Touch the down arrow until Scanner Manual Registration appears.
6 Touch Scanner Manual Registration.
7 Touch Print Quick Test to print a registration page.
8 Choose the section of the scanner to align.
Maintaining the printer
249
To align the scanner glass (flatbed): a Place the Quick Test page facedown on the scanner glass.
b Touch Copy Quick Test.
The scanner prints a copy of the Quick Test page.
c Touch Flatbed.
d Use the copy of the Quick Test page to adjust the Left Margin and Top Margin settings.
e Touch Submit.
f Touch Copy Quick Test and compare the new copy to the original.
Repeat the flatbed alignment steps until the position on the page of the Quick Test copy closely matches the original.
To align the ADF: a Do one of the following:
• To align the ADF front: place the Quick Test page faceup, short edge first into the ADF.
• To align the ADF back: place the Quick Test page facedown, short edge first into the ADF.
b Touch Copy Quick Test.
The scanner prints a copy of the Quick Test page.
c Touch ADF Front or ADF Back.
d Use the copy of the Quick Test page to adjust the Horizontal Adjust and Top Margin settings.
e Touch Submit.
f Touch Copy Quick Test and compare the new copy to the original.
Repeat the ADF alignment steps until the position on the page of the Quick Test copy closely matches the original.
9 Touch Back.
10 Touch Exit Configuration.
Storing supplies
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you are ready to use them.
Maintaining the printer
250
Do not expose supplies to:
• Direct sunlight
• Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
• High humidity above 80%
• Salty air
• Corrosive gases
• Heavy dust
Conserving supplies
There are some settings you can change from the printer control panel that will help you conserve toner and paper.
For more information, see “Supplies menu,” “Quality menu,” and “Finishing menu.”
If you need to print several copies, you can conserve supplies by printing the first copy and checking it for accuracy before printing the remaining copies.
Checking the status of supplies
A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required.
Checking the status of supplies from the printer control panel
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch Status/Supplies.
Note: If Status/Supplies is not on the home screen, then print a menu settings page to review the status of the supplies.
Checking the status of supplies from a network computer
Note: The computer must be connected to the same network as the printer.
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Device Status. The Device Status page appears, displaying a summary of supply levels.
Maintaining the printer
251
Ordering supplies
To order supplies, contact the place where you purchased the printer.
Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter- or A4-size plain paper.
Ordering print cartridges
When 88 Cartridge low appears or when the print becomes faded:
1 Remove the print cartridge.
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute toner.
3 Reinsert the cartridge and continue printing.
Note: Repeat this procedure multiple times until the print remains faded, and then replace the cartridge.
Moving the printer
Before moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to move it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage:
• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
Maintaining the printer
252
• Lift the printer off of the optional drawer and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same time.
Notes:
– Remove all printer options before moving the printer.
– Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty.
Moving the printer to another location
The printer and options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:
• Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer. Any cart used to move the options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the options.
• Keep the printer in an upright position.
• Avoid severe jarring movements.
Setting the printer up in a new location
Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer:
1 Right Side 20 cm (8 in.)
2 Left Side 31 cm (12 in.)
3 Front
4 Rear
5 Top
51 cm (20 in.)
20 cm (8 in.)
31 cm (12 in.)
Shipping the printer
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.
Maintaining the printer
253
Administrative support
Using the Embedded Web Server
If the printer is installed on a network, the Embedded Web Server is available for a range of functions including:
• Viewing a virtual display of the printer control panel
• Checking the status of the printer supplies
• Configuring printer settings
• Configuring network settings
• Viewing reports
To access the Embedded Web Server, type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
Checking the device status
Using the Embedded Web Server, you can view paper tray settings, the level of toner in the print cartridge, the percentage of life remaining in the maintenance kit, and capacity measurements of certain printer parts. To view the device status:
1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Device Status.
Setting up e-mail alerts
You can have the printer send you an e-mail when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed, added, or unjammed.
To set up e-mail alerts:
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Under Other Settings, click E-mail Alert Setup.
4 Select the items for notification, and type in the e-mail addresses.
5 Click Submit.
Note: See your system support person to set up the e-mail server.
Administrative support
254
Viewing reports
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the printer, the network, and supplies.
To view reports from a network printer:
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.
Adjusting the brightness of the display
If you are having trouble reading your display, the LCD brightness can be adjusted through the Settings menu.
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch .
3 Touch Settings.
4 Touch General Settings.
5 Touch the down arrow until Screen Brightness appears.
6 Touch the arrows to increase or decrease the brightness.
Brightness settings can be adjusted from 20–100 (100 is the factory default setting).
7 Touch Submit.
8 Touch .
Adjusting Power Saver
Available settings range from 1–240 minutes. The factory default is 30 minutes.
To increase or decrease the number of minutes before the printer enters Power Saver mode, do one of the following:
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings, and then click General Settings.
3 Click Timeouts.
4 In the Power Saver box, increase or decrease the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters
Power Saver mode.
5 Click Submit.
Administrative support
255
Using the printer control panel
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch .
3 Touch Settings.
4 Touch General Settings.
5 Touch the down arrow until Timeouts appears.
6 Touch Timeouts.
7 Touch the left or right arrow next to Power Saver Mode to decrease or increase the time the printer waits before entering Power Saver mode.
The settings available range from 1–240 minutes.
8 Touch Submit.
9 Touch .
Restoring the factory default settings
If you want to retain a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before you
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default setting. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and Network/Port menu settings. All downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected.
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch .
3 Touch Settings.
4 Touch General Settings.
5 Touch the down arrow until Factory Defaults appears.
6 Touch the left or right arrow until Restore Now appears.
7 Touch Submit.
8 Touch .
Administrative support
256
Troubleshooting
Solving basic printer problems
If there are basic printer problems, or the printer is unresponsive, make sure:
• The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
• The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.
• The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.
• Other electronic equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
• The printer is turned on. Check the printer power switch.
• The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network device.
• All options are properly installed.
• The printer driver settings are correct.
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on. This often fixes the problem.
Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds
The printer self test failed. Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
If Ready does not appear, then turn the printer off and contact Customer Support.
Solving printing problems
Multiple-language PDFs do not print
The documents contain unavailable fonts.
1 Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.
2 Click the printer icon.
The Print dialog appears.
3 Select Print as image.
4 Click OK.
Error message about reading USB drive appears
Make sure the USB drive is supported. For information regarding tested and approved USB flash memory devices, contact the place where you purchased your printer.
Troubleshooting
257
Jobs do not print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
M
AKE SURE THE PRINTER IS READY TO PRINT
Make sure Ready or Power Saver appears on the display before sending a job to print.
C
HECK TO SEE IF THE STANDARD EXIT BIN IS FULL
Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin.
C
HECK TO SEE IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY
Load paper in the tray.
M
AKE SURE THE CORRECT PRINTER SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED
• Verify that you are using the correct printer software.
• If you are using a USB port, make sure you are running a supported operating system and using compatible printer software.
M
AKE SURE THE INTERNAL PRINT SERVER IS INSTALLED PROPERLY AND WORKING
• Make sure the internal print server is properly installed and that the printer is connected to the network.
• Print a network setup page and check that the status shows Connected. If the status is Not Connected, check the network cables, and then try printing the network setup page again. Contact your system support person to make sure the network is functioning correctly.
M
AKE SURE YOU ARE USING A RECOMMENDED
USB,
SERIAL
,
OR
E
THERNET CABLE
For more information contact the place where you bought the printer.
M
AKE SURE PRINTER CABLES ARE SECURELY CONNECTED
Check the cable connections to the printer and print server to make sure they are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.
Confidential and other held jobs do not print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
P
ARTIAL JOB
,
NO JOB
,
OR BLANK PAGES PRINT
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.
• Delete the print job, and then print it again.
• For PDF documents, recreate the PDF and then print it again.
Troubleshooting
258
M
AKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS SUFFICIENT MEMORY
Free up additional printer memory by scrolling through the list of held jobs and deleting some of them.
Job takes longer than expected to print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
R
EDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB
Eliminate the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the job.
C
HANGE THE
P
AGE
P
ROTECT SETTING TO
O
FF
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch .
3 Touch Settings.
4 Touch General Settings.
5 Touch the down arrow until Print Recovery appears.
6 Touch Print Recovery.
7 Touch the right arrow next to Page Protect until Off appears.
8 Touch Submit.
9 Touch .
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
C
HECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
Incorrect characters print
M
AKE SURE THE PRINTER IS NOT IN
H
EX
T
RACE MODE
If Ready Hex appears on the display, then you must exit Hex Trace mode before you can print your job. Turn the printer off and back on to exit Hex Trace mode.
Troubleshooting
259
Tray linking does not work
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
L
OAD THE SAME SIZE AND TYPE OF PAPER
• Load the same size and type of paper in each tray to be linked.
• Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in each tray.
U
SE THE SAME
P
APER
S
IZE AND
P
APER
T
YPE SETTINGS
• Print a menu settings page and compare the settings for each tray.
• If necessary, adjust the settings from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Note: The multipurpose feeder does not automatically sense the paper size. You must set the size from the Paper
Size/Type menu.
Large jobs do not collate
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
M
AKE SURE
C
OLLATE IS SET TO
O
N
From the Finishing menu or Print Properties, set Collate to On.
Note: Setting Collate to Off in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu.
R
EDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the job.
M
AKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS ENOUGH MEMORY
Add printer memory or an optional hard disk.
Unexpected page breaks occur
I
NCREASE THE
P
RINT
T
IMEOUT VALUE
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch .
3 Touch Settings.
4 Touch General Settings.
5 Touch the down arrow until Timeouts appears.
6 Touch Timeouts.
7 Touch the left or right arrow next to Print Timeout until the desired value appears.
Troubleshooting
260
8 Touch Submit.
9 Touch .
Solving copy problems
Copier does not respond
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
C
HECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.
Scanner unit does not close
Make sure there are no obstructions:
1 Lift the scanner unit.
2 Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.
3 Lower the scanner unit.
Poor copy quality
These are some examples of poor copy quality:
• Blank pages
• Checkerboard pattern
• Distorted graphics or pictures
• Missing characters
• Faded print
• Dark print
• Skewed lines
• Smudges
• Streaks
• Unexpected characters
• White lines in print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
Troubleshooting
261
T
HE TONER MAY BE LOW
When 88 Cartridge low appears or when the print becomes faded, replace the print cartridge.
T
HE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY
T
HE COPY IS TOO LIGHT OR TOO DARK
Adjust the density of the copy.
C
HECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT
Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
C
HECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
U
NWANTED TONER IS IN THE BACKGROUND
• Increase the background removal setting.
• Adjust the darkness to a lighter setting.
P
ATTERNS
(
MOIRÉ
)
APPEAR IN THE OUTPUT
• On the Copy screen, select the Text/Photo or Printed Image icon.
• Rotate the original document on the scanner glass.
• On the Copy screen, adjust the scale setting.
T
EXT IS LIGHT OR DISAPPEARING
• On the Copy screen, touch the Text icon.
• Decrease the background removal setting.
• Increase the contrast setting.
• Decrease the shadow detail setting.
T
HE OUTPUT APPEARS WASHED OUT OR OVEREXPOSED
• On the Copy screen, select the Printed Image icon.
• Decrease the background removal setting.
Troubleshooting
262
Partial document or photo copies
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
C
HECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Solving scanner problems
Checking an unresponsive scanner
If your scanner is not responding, then make sure:
• The printer is turned on.
• The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network device.
• The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
• The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.
• The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.
• Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off and then back on. This often fixes the problem with the scanner.
Scan was not successful
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.
A
N ERROR MAY HAVE OCCURRED IN THE PROGRAM
Turn off and then restart the computer.
Troubleshooting
263
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
O
THER SOFTWARE PROGRAMS MAY BE INTERFERING WITH SCANNING
Close all programs not being used.
T
HE SCAN RESOLUTION MAY BE SET TOO HIGH
Select a lower scan resolution.
Poor scanned image quality
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
T
HE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY
A
DJUST THE SCAN RESOLUTION
Increase the resolution of the scan for a higher quality output.
C
HECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT
Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
C
HECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Partial document or photo scans
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Troubleshooting
264
C
HECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Cannot scan from a computer
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
C
HECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.
C
HECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.
Solving fax problems
Caller ID is not shown
Contact your telecommunications company to verify that your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service.
If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, you may have to change the default setting. There are two settings available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2). The availability of these settings by way of the Fax menu depends on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns. Contact your telecommunications company to determine which pattern or switch setting to use.
Cannot send or receive a fax
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
C
HECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.
Troubleshooting
265
C
HECK THE PRINTER CONNECTIONS
Make sure the cable connections for the following hardware are secure, if applicable:
• Telephone
• Handset
• Answering machine
C
HECK THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK
1 Plug a telephone into the wall jack.
2 Listen for a dial tone.
3 If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone into the wall jack.
4 If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug a telephone into a different wall jack.
5 If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.
R
EVIEW THIS DIGITAL PHONE SERVICE CHECKLIST
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used.
• If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface port) on an ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an R-interface port, contact your ISDN provider.
• If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use. For more information, contact your DSL provider.
• If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the
PBX. If none exists, consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.
C
HECK FOR A DIAL TONE
• Place a test call to the telephone number to which you want to send a fax to make sure that it is working correctly.
• If the telephone line is being used by another device, then wait until the other device is finished before sending a fax.
• If you are using the On Hook Dial feature, then turn up the volume to verify a dial tone.
T
EMPORARILY DISCONNECT OTHER EQUIPMENT
To ensure the printer is working correctly, connect it directly to the telephone line. Disconnect any answering machines, computers with modems, or telephone line splitters.
C
HECK FOR JAMS
Clear any jams, and then make sure that Ready appears.
Troubleshooting
266
T
EMPORARILY DISABLE
C
ALL
W
AITING
Call Waiting can disrupt fax transmissions. Disable this feature before sending or receiving a fax. Call your telephone company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling Call Waiting.
V
OICE
M
AIL SERVICE MAY BE INTERFERING WITH THE FAX TRANSMISSION
Voice Mail offered through your local telephone company may disrupt fax transmissions. To enable both Voice
Mail and the printer to answer calls, you may want to consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.
T
HE PRINTER MEMORY MAY BE FULL
1 Dial the fax number.
2 Scan the original document one page at a time.
Can send but not receive faxes
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK TO SEE IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY
Load paper in the tray.
C
HECK THE RING COUNT DELAY SETTINGS
The ring count delay sets the number of times the phone line rings before the printer answers. If you have extension phones on the same line as the printer, or subscribe to the telephone company's Distinctive Ring service, then keep the Ring Delay setting at 4.
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Fax Settings.
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.
5 In the Rings to Answer box, enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before answering.
6 Click Submit.
T
HE TONER MAY BE LOW
88 Cartridge low appears when the toner is low.
Troubleshooting
267
Can receive but not send faxes
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
T
HE PRINTER IS NOT IN
F
AX MODE
On the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode.
T
HE DOCUMENT IS NOT LOADED PROPERLY
Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
M
AKE SURE THE SHORTCUT NUMBER IS SET UP PROPERLY
• Check to make sure the shortcut number has been programmed for the number that you want to dial.
• As an alternative, dial the telephone number manually.
Received fax has poor print quality
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
R
E
-
SEND THE DOCUMENT
Ask the person who sent you the fax to:
• Check that the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
• Resend the fax. There may have been a problem with the quality of the telephone line connection.
• Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.
T
HE TONER MAY BE LOW
When 88 Cartridge low appears or when you experience faded print, replace the cartridge.
M
AKE SURE THE FAX TRANSMISSION SPEED IS NOT SET TOO HIGH
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed:
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Fax Settings.
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.
Troubleshooting
268
5 In the Max Speed box, click on one of the following:
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
6 Click Submit.
Solving option problems
Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
R
ESET THE PRINTER
Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
C
HECK TO SEE IF THE OPTION IS CONNECTED TO THE PRINTER
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the printer.
3 Check the connection between the option and the printer.
M
AKE SURE THE OPTION IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
Print a menu settings page and check to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list. If the option is not listed, then reinstall it. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that came with the option.
M
AKE SURE THE OPTION IS SELECTED
Paper trays
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
M
AKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY
1 Open the paper tray.
2 Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
3 Make sure paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper.
4 Make sure the paper tray closes properly.
Troubleshooting
269
R
ESET THE PRINTER
Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
M
AKE SURE THE PAPER TRAY IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
If the paper tray is listed on the menu settings page, but paper jams when it enters or exits the tray, then it may not be properly installed. Reinstall the paper tray. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that came with the paper tray.
2000-sheet tray
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
T
HE ELEVATOR TRAY IS NOT WORKING PROPERLY
• Make sure the printer is properly connected to the 2000-sheet tray.
• Make sure the printer is turned on.
T
HE PAPER FEED ROLLERS DO NOT TURN TO ADVANCE PAPER
• Make sure the printer is properly connected to the 2000-sheet tray.
• Make sure the printer is turned on.
Envelope feeder
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
R
ESET THE PRINTER
Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
M
AKE SURE THE ENVELOPES ARE LOADED CORRECTLY
1 Adjust the envelope support for the length of envelope you are using.
2
For more information, see “Loading the envelope feeder” on page 80.
C
HECK THE PAPER TYPE AND PAPER SIZE SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type and paper size settings match the envelopes you are using:
1 From the printer control panel, check the settings for the envelope feeder from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct settings from the computer:
• For Windows users, specify the settings from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the settings from the Print dialog.
Troubleshooting
270
M
AKE SURE THE ENVELOPE FEEDER IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
If the envelope feeder is listed on the menu settings page, but an envelope jams when it enters or exits the envelope feeder, then it may not be properly installed. Reinstall the envelope feeder. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that came with the envelope feeder.
Output options
If the high capacity output expander, 4-bin mailbox, or StapleSmart finisher is listed on the menu settings page, but paper jams when it exits the printer or enters the output option, then it may not be properly installed. Reinstall the option. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that came with the option.
Flash memory card
Make sure the flash memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.
Hard disk with adapter
Make sure the hard disk is securely connected to the printer system board.
Internal Solutions Port
If the Internal Solutions Port (ISP) does not operate correctly, then these are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE
ISP
CONNECTIONS
• Make sure the ISP is securely attached to the printer system board.
• Make sure the cable is securely connected to the correct connector.
C
HECK THE CABLE
Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected.
M
AKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY
For information about installing software for network printing, see the Networking Guide on the Software and
Documentation CD
Memory card
Make sure the memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.
Troubleshooting
271
Solving paper feed problems
Paper frequently jams
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE PAPER
Use recommended paper and specialty media. For more information, see the chapter about paper and specialty media guidelines.
M
AKE SURE THERE IS NOT TOO MUCH PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY
Make sure the stack of paper you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray or on the multipurpose feeder.
C
HECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
T
HE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY
• Load paper from a fresh package.
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared
C
HECK THE PAPER PATH
The paper path is not clear. Clear jammed paper from the entire paper path, and then touch Continue.
Page that jammed does not reprint after you clear the jam
T
URN ON
J
AM
R
ECOVERY
In the Setup menu, Jam Recovery is set to Off. Set Jam Recovery to Auto or On:
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch .
3 Touch Settings.
4 Touch General Settings.
5 Touch the down arrow until Print Recovery appears.
6 Touch Print Recovery.
7 Touch the right arrow next to Jam Recovery until On or Auto appears.
Troubleshooting
272
8 Touch Submit.
9 Touch .
Solving print quality problems
The information in the following topics may help you solve print quality problems. If these suggestions still do not correct the problem, contact Customer Support. You may have a printer part that requires adjustment or replacement.
Isolating print quality problems
To help isolate print quality problems, print the print quality test pages:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Load Letter- or A4-size paper in the tray.
3 Hold down and while turning the printer on.
4 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears.
5 Touch the down arrow until Print Quality Pages appears.
6 Touch Print Quality Pages.
The print quality test pages print.
7 Touch Back.
8 Touch Exit Configuration.
Blank pages
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
P
ACKING MATERIAL MAY BE ON THE PRINT CARTRIDGE
Remove the print cartridge and make sure the packing material is properly removed. Reinstall the print cartridge.
T
HE TONER MAY BE LOW
When 88 Cartridge low appears, order a new print cartridge.
If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact Customer Support.
Troubleshooting
273
Characters have jagged or uneven edges
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE PRINT QUALITY SETTINGS
• Change the Print Resolution setting in the Quality menu to 600 dpi, 1200 Image Q, 1200 dpi, or 2400 Image Q.
• Enable Enhance Fine Lines in the Quality menu.
M
AKE SURE DOWNLOADED FONTS ARE SUPPORTED
If you are using downloaded fonts, then verify that the fonts are supported by the printer, the host computer, and the software program.
Clipped images
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE GUIDES
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
C
HECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Ghost images
Troubleshooting
274
C
HECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
Gray background
C
HECK THE
T
ONER
D
ARKNESS SETTING
Select a lighter Toner Darkness setting:
• From the printer control panel, change the setting from the Quality menu.
• For Windows users, change the setting from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, change the setting from the Print dialog.
Incorrect margins
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
Troubleshooting
275
C
HECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Paper curl
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
T
HE PAPER HAS ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY
• Load paper from a fresh package.
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
Print irregularities
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
T
HE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY
• Load paper from a fresh package.
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
Troubleshooting
276
C
HECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
C
HECK THE PAPER
Avoid textured paper with rough finishes.
T
HE TONER MAY BE LOW
When 88 Cartridge low appears or when the print becomes faded, replace the print cartridge.
T
HE FUSER MAY BE WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the fuser.
Repeating defects
R
EPEATING MARKS OCCUR EVENLY DOWN THE PAGE
Replace the charge rolls if the defects occur every 28.3 mm (1.11 in.).
Replace the transfer roller if the defects occur every 51.7 mm (2.04 in.).
Replace the print cartridge if the defects occur every:
• 47.8 mm (1.88 in.)
• 96.8 mm (3.81 in.)
Replace the fuser if the defects occur every:
• 88.0 mm (3.46 in.)
• 95.2 mm (3.75 in.)
Troubleshooting
277
Skewed print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
C
HECK THE PAPER
Make sure you are using paper that meets the printer specifications.
Solid black or white streaks
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
M
AKE SURE THE FILL PATTERN IS CORRECT
If the fill pattern is incorrect, then choose a different fill pattern from your software program or application.
C
HECK THE PAPER TYPE
• Try a different type of paper.
• Use only transparencies recommended by the printer manufacturer.
• Make sure the Paper Type and Paper Texture settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder.
M
AKE SURE THE TONER IS DISTRIBUTED EVENLY IN THE PRINT CARTRIDGE
Remove the print cartridge and shake it from side to side to redistribute the toner, and then reinstall it.
T
HE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE OR LOW ON TONER
Replace the used print cartridge with a new one.
Troubleshooting
278
Print is too light
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE DARKNESS
,
BRIGHTNESS
,
AND CONTRAST SETTINGS
The Toner Darkness setting is too light, the Brightness setting is too light, or the Contrast setting is too low.
• From the printer control panel, change these settings from the Quality menu.
• For Windows users, change these settings from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, change these settings from the Print dialog and pop-up menus.
T
HE PAPER HAS ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY
• Load paper from a fresh package.
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
C
HECK THE PAPER
Avoid textured paper with rough finishes.
C
HECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
T
HE TONER IS LOW
When 88 Cartridge Low appears, order a new print cartridge.
T
HE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE
Replace the print cartridge.
Troubleshooting
279
Print is too dark
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE DARKNESS
,
BRIGHTNESS
,
AND CONTRAST SETTINGS
The Toner Darkness setting is too dark, the Brightness setting is too dark, or the Contrast setting is too high.
• From the printer control panel, change these settings from the Quality menu.
• For Windows users, change these settings from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, change these settings from the Print dialog and pop-up menus.
T
HE PAPER HAS ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY
• Load paper from a fresh package.
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
C
HECK THE PAPER
Avoid textured paper with rough finishes.
C
HECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
T
HE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE
Replace the print cartridge.
Troubleshooting
280
Solid color pages
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
M
AKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS PROPERLY INSTALLED
Remove the print cartridge and shake it from side to side to redistribute the toner, and then reinstall it.
T
HE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE OR LOW ON TONER
Replace the used print cartridge with a new one. If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced.
For more information, contact Customer Support.
Streaked vertical lines
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
T
HE TONER IS SMEARED
Select another tray or feeder to feed paper for the job:
• From the printer control panel, select the Default Source from the Paper Menu.
• For Windows users, select the paper source from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop-up menus.
T
HE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS DEFECTIVE
Replace the print cartridge.
T
HE PAPER PATH MAY NOT BE CLEAR
Check the paper path around the print cartridge.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Troubleshooting
281
Clear any paper you see.
T
HERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH
Contact Customer Support.
Toner fog or background shading appears on the page
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
T
HE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE
Replace the print cartridge.
T
HE CHARGE ROLLS MAY BE DEFECTIVE
Replace the charge rolls.
T
HERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH
Contact Customer Support.
Toner rubs off
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
C
HECK THE
P
APER
T
EXTURE SETTING
From the printer control panel Paper menu, make sure the Paper Texture setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.
Troubleshooting
282
Toner specks
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
T
HE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE
Replace the print cartridge.
T
HERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH
Contact Customer Support.
Transparency print quality is poor
Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE TRANSPARENCIES
Use only transparencies recommended by the printer manufacturer.
C
HECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
Embedded Web Server does not open
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE NETWORK CONNECTIONS
Make sure the printer and computer are turned on and connected to the same network.
Troubleshooting
283
C
HECK THE NETWORK SETTINGS
Depending on the network settings, you may need to type https:// instead of http:// before the printer IP address to access the Embedded Web Server. For more information, see your system administrator.
Contacting Customer Support
When you call Customer Support, describe the problem you are experiencing, the message on the display, and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.
You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label on the inside top front cover of the printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.
For customer support, contact the place where you purchased your printer.
Troubleshooting
284
Notices
Product name:
Monochrome Laser MFP
Machine type:
4548, 4566, 4567, 4568, 5535, 7462
Model(s): aa1, aa2, bb1, bb2, bd1, bd2, b01, b02, cc1, cc2, dn, dn1, dn2, dt1, dt2, f01, f02, fd1, fd2, g01, g02, g61, g62, g71, g72, g81, g82, g91, g92, gb1, gb2, gf1, gf2, gn1, gn2, gs1, gs2, gt1, gt2, mn1, n01, n02, s01, s02, sd1, sd2, t01, t02, tb1, tb2, tf1, tf2, ts1, ts2, 0A1, 0A5, 031, 035, 2A1, 2A2, 2A5, 2A6, 231, 232, 235, 236, 4A2, 4A6, 432, 436
Edition notice
October 2009
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local
law: LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made at any time.
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RIGHTS
This software and any accompanying documentation provided under this agreement are commercial computer software and documentation developed exclusively at private expense.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Notices
285
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device, use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC regulations.
Compliance statement
This product complies with the Class A emission requirements of EN55022 and immunity requirements of EN55024.
This product is not intended to be used in residential environments.
Exposure to radio frequency radiation
The following notice is applicable if your printer has a wireless network card installed.
The radiated output power of this device is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC.
Industry Canada notices
Industry Canada compliance statement
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard
ICES-003.
Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada
Cet appareil numérique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux équipements pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.
Industry Canada radio interference statement
Industry Canada (Canada)
This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada.
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing.
Notices
286
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit
RF fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health
Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Industry Canada (Canada)
Cet appareil est conforme à la norme RSS-210 d'Industry Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celles risquant d'altérer son fonctionnement.
Cet appareil a été conçu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l'antenne fournie. L'utilisation de toute autre antenne est strictement interdite par la réglementation d'Industry Canada.
En application des réglementations d'Industry Canada, l'utilisation d'une antenne de gain supérieur est strictement interdite.
Pour empêcher toute interférence radio au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, cet appareil doit être utilisé à l'intérieur et loin des fenêtres afin de garantir une protection optimale.
Si le matériel (ou son antenne d'émission) est installé à l'extérieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence.
L'installateur de cet équipement radio doit veiller à ce que l'antenne soit implantée et dirigée de manière à n'émettre aucun champ HF dépassant les limites fixées pour l'ensemble de la population par Santé Canada. Reportez-vous au
Code de sécurité 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Santé Canada www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
Le terme « IC » précédant le numéro de d'accréditation/inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d'Industry Canada.
Radio interference notice
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case, the user may be required to take adequate measures.
European Community (EC) directives conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
A declaration of conformity with the requirements of the directives is available from the Director of Manufacturing and Technical Support, Lexmark International, S. A., Boigny, France.
Notices
287
This product satisfies the limits of EN 55022; safety requirements of EN 60950; radio spectrum requirements of ETSI
EN 300 330-1 and ETSI EN 300 330-2; and the EMC requirements of EN 55024, ETSI EN 301 489-1 and ETSI EN 301
489-3.
Česky
Dansk
Deutsch
Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.
Ελληνική ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ
ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ
ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
English
Español
Eesti
Suomi
Français
Magyar
Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.
Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.
Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Íslenska Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviski Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Lietuvių Šiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas
1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.
Malti Bil-preżenti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.
Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Norsk Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.
Notices
288
Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.
Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Svenska Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
India emissions notice
This device uses very low power low range RF communication that has been tested and found not to cause any interference whatsoever. The manufacturer is not responsible in case of any disputes arising out of requirement of permissions from any local authority, regulatory bodies or any organization, required by the end-user to install and operate this product at his premises.
Noise emission levels
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Printing 56 dBA
Scanning
Copying
Ready
52 dBA
56 dBA
30 dBA
Temperature information
Ambient temperature
Shipping and storage temperature
15.6C° – 32.2C°
-40.0C° – 60.0C°
Product disposal
Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local authorities for disposal and recycling options.
Notices
289
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to your telephone company.
This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant.
See your setup documentation for more information.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format
US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of
0.3). For earlier products, the REN is shown separately on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact your point of purchase. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact your point of purchase.
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and
Notices
290
an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a
900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.
Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminus of an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter’s
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges.
This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.
Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada
Ce produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada. Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence number : numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant
être connectés à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui peuvent être connectés n’est pas directement limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas dépasser cinq. Le numéro REN du modem est indiqué sur l’étiquette produit située à l’arrière de l’équipement.
Les compagnies de téléphone constatent que les surtensions électriques, en particulier celles dues à la foudre, entraînent d'importants dégâts sur les terminaux privés connectés à des sources d’alimentation CA. Il s’agit-là d’un problème majeur d’échelle nationale. En conséquence, il vous est recommandé de brancher un parasurtenseur dans la prise de courant à laquelle l’équipement est connecté. Utilisez un parasurtenseur répondant à des caractéristiques nominales satisfaisantes et certifié par le laboratoire d’assureurs UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), un autre laboratoire agréé de type NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory) ou un organisme de certification agréé dans votre région ou pays. Ceci prévient tout endommagement de l’équipement causé par les orages et autres surtensions
électriques.
Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.
Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network
The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of
Telecom's network services.
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.
Notices
291
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers.
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance to Telecom's specifications:
• There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation, and
• The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next call attempt.
• The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.
South Africa telecommunications notice
This modem must be used in conjunction with an approved surge protection device when connected to the PSTN.
Using this product in Switzerland
This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter to be installed on any line which receives metering pulses in
Switzerland. The Lexmark filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines in
Switzerland.
Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse
Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un filtre de tonalité de facturation suisse devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse. Ce filtre doit être installé car les impulsions de comptage sont utilisées sur toutes les lignes téléphoniques analogiques en Suisse.
Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz
Für dieses Produkt muss ein Schweizer Billing Tone Filter (zur Zählzeichenübertragung) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen werden. Die Verwendung des Billing Tone Filters ist obligatorisch, da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind.
Uso del prodotto in Svizzera
Per questo prodotto è necessario un filtro toni Billing svizzero, da installare su tutte le linee che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera. È necessario utilizzare il filtro toni Billing dal momento che gli impulsi remoti sono presenti su tutte le linee telefoniche in Svizzera.
Notices
292
ENERGY STAR
Laser notice
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J for Class I (1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser that is nominally a 5 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 770-795 nanometers. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.
Laser advisory label
A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:
Power consumption
Product power consumption
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
Mode
Printing
Copying
Description
The product is generating hard-copy output from electronic inputs.
The product is generating hard-copy output from hard-copy original documents.
Scanning The product is scanning hard-copy documents.
Ready The product is waiting for a print job.
Power Saver The product is in energy-saving mode.
Off The product is plugged into a wall outlet, but the power switch is turned off.
Power consumption (Watts)
700 W
765 W
165 W
95 W
21 W
110V = 0.15W, 220V = 1.25W
The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average.
Notices
293
Power Saver
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Power Saver. The Power Saver Mode is equivalent to the EPA Sleep Mode. The Power Saver Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Power Saver Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of time, called the Power Saver Timeout.
Factory default Power Saver Timeout for this product (in minutes): 110V = 45 minutes, 220V = 60 minutes
By using the configuration menus, the Power Saver Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 240 minutes.
Setting the Power Saver Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response time of the product. Setting the Power Saver Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.
Off mode
If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the wall outlet.
Total energy usage
It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.
Notices
294
Index
Numerics
1565 Emulation error, load
2000-sheet tray
250-sheet tray (standard or optional)
293 Replace all originals if restarting
30 Invalid refill, change
31 Replace defective cartridge 238
32 Cartridge part number
35 Insufficient memory to support
37 Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment
37 Insufficient memory to collate
37 Insufficient memory, some Held
37 Insufficient memory, some held
39 Complex page, some data may
42.xy Cartridge region
51 Defective flash detected 240
52 Not enough free space in flash
53 Unformatted flash
54 Network <x> software error 241
54 Serial option <x> error 241
54 Standard network software
55 Unsupported option in slot 242
550-sheet tray (standard or optional)
56 Parallel port <x> disabled 242
56 Serial port <x> disabled 242
56 Standard parallel port
56 Standard USB port disabled 242
57 Configuration change, held jobs
58 Too many disks installed 243
58 Too many flash options
58 Too many trays attached 244
59 Incompatible envelope
59 Incompatible output bin
80 Routine maintenance
841-846 Scanner Service Error 246
88.yy Cartridge nearly low 245
Symbols
“scan to computer” screen
A
address book, fax
ADF
B
buttons, printer control panel 17
C
cables
canceling a job
from the printer control
card stock
checking an unresponsive
checking an unresponsive
checking device status
cleaning
exterior of the printer 248 scanner glass 248
Close door or insert cartridge 230
printing from Macintosh
configuration information
configurations
configuring
Index
295
configuring the e-mail
connecting fax
connecting the printer to
telephone wall jack in
contacting Customer Support 284
copy quality
copy screen
copy troubleshooting
partial document or photo
poor scanned image quality 264
scanner unit does not close 261
copying
adding a date and time stamp 99 adding an overlay message 99
document containing mixed
multiple pages on one sheet 97
on both sides of the paper
placing separator sheets between
using the scanner glass
custom paper type
Custom Type <x>
D
date and time
Disk Full - Scan Job Canceled 230
display troubleshooting
display shows only
display, printer control panel 17
documents, printing
from Macintosh 129 from Windows 129
E
Embedded Web Server 254 checking device status 254
emission
notices 285, 286, 287, 288, 289
envelopes
Ethernet networking
exterior of the printer
Index
296
notice of low supply level 254 notice of paper jam 254 notice of paper needed 254
notice that different paper is
e-mail function
e-mail screen
e-mailing
adding message line 107 adding subject line 107 changing output file type 107
configuring the e-mail
creating shortcuts using the
creating shortcuts using the touch
setting up e-mail function 104
using shortcut numbers 106 using the address book 106 using the touch screen 106
F
factory defaults, restoring
printer control panel menus 256
fax card
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup)
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
fax screen
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system administrator. 231
Fax Station Name not set up 231
Fax Station Number not set up 231
fax troubleshooting
can receive but not send
can send but not receive
cannot send or receive a fax 265
received fax has poor print
faxing
creating shortcuts using the
creating shortcuts using the touch
holding faxes 118 improving fax quality 118
making a fax lighter or
sending a fax at a scheduled
sending using the computer 112
sending using the printer control
setting the outgoing fax name and
turning Daylight Saving Time
using shortcuts 113 using the address book 113
fiber optic
firmware card
flash memory card
FTP
FTP screen
G
guidelines
H
hard disk with adapter
printing from Macintosh
home screen
I
installation
installing
installing printer software
Internal Solutions Port
Internal Solutions Port, network
J
jams
locating doors and trays 139 locations 139 numbers 139
Index
297 jams, clearing
Job stored for delayed
L
labels
letterhead
loading, multipurpose feeder 78
Load manual feeder with <x> 233
loading
250-sheet tray (standard or
550-sheet tray (standard or
card stock 78 envelopes 78, 80
letterhead in 2000-sheet tray 74
letterhead in multipurpose
multipurpose feeder 78 transparencies 78
M
Macintosh
wireless network installation 49
memory card
Memory full, cannot print
menu settings page
menus
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) 194
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) 202
multiple pages on one sheet 97
multipurpose feeder
N
No analog phone line connected to
noise emission levels 289 notices 285, 286, 287, 288, 289,
O
options
memory cards 24 networking 24 ports 24
options, touch-screen
scan to computer 126, 127, 128
output file type
P
paper
letterhead 85 preprinted forms 85
setting size 70 setting type 70
paper feed troubleshooting message remains after jam is
paper jams
paper sizes
paper type
paper types
duplex support 89 supported by output bins 89 supported by printer 89 where to load 89
paper weights
photos
port settings
Power Saver
print job
canceling from Macintosh 136 canceling from Windows 136
Index
298
print quality
cleaning the scanner glass 248
print quality test pages,
print quality troubleshooting
characters have jagged
edges 274 clipped images 274 ghost images 274
skewed print 278 solid black streaks 278
toner fog or background
shading 282 toner rubs off 282
print troubleshooting
incorrect characters print 259
jammed page does not
job prints from wrong tray 259 job prints on wrong paper 259
job takes longer than
multiple-language PDFs do not
tray linking does not work 260
unexpected page breaks
printer
configurations 14 minimum clearances 14, 253 models 14
setting up in new location 253 shipping 253
factory defaults, restoring 256
printer hard disk
printer messages
1565 Emulation error, load
293 Replace all originals if
30 Invalid refill, change
31 Replace defective
32 Cartridge part number
35 Insufficient memory to support
37 Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment
37 Insufficient memory to collate
37 Insufficient memory, some Held
37 Insufficient memory, some held
39 Complex page, some data may
42.xy Cartridge region
51 Defective flash detected 240
52 Not enough free space in flash
53 Unformatted flash
54 Network <x> software
54 Serial option <x> error 241
54 Standard network software
55 Unsupported option in
56 Parallel port <x> disabled 242
Index
299
56 Serial port <x> disabled 242
56 Standard parallel port
56 Standard USB port
57 Configuration change, held
58 Too many disks installed 243
58 Too many flash options
58 Too many trays attached 244
59 Incompatible envelope
59 Incompatible output bin
80 Routine maintenance
841-846 Scanner Service
88.yy Cartridge nearly low 245
Close door or insert cartridge 230
Disk Full - Scan Job Canceled 230
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system
Fax Station Name not set up 231
Fax Station Number not set
Job stored for delayed
Load manual feeder with
Memory full, cannot print
No analog phone line connected
to modem, fax is disabled. 234
Remove packaging material,
Remove paper from <linked bin
Remove paper from all bins 236
Remove paper from standard
Replace all originals if restarting
Scanner Jam Access Cover
Securely clearing disk space 237
SMTP server not set up. Contact
Some held jobs were not
System busy, preparing resources
System busy, preparing resources
for job. Deleting held job(s). 238
Unsupported USB device, please
Unsupported USB hub, please
printer options troubleshooting
flash memory card 271 hard disk with adapter 271
high capacity output
Internal Solutions Port 271 memory card 271
option not working 269 paper trays 269
printer problems, solving
printing
from Macintosh 129 from Windows 129
installing printer software 45
printing confidential and other held jobs
Q
R
recycled paper
Remove packaging material, check
Remove paper from <linked bin set
Remove paper from all bins 236
Remove paper from standard
printing from Macintosh
Replace all originals if restarting
reports
printing from Macintosh
resolution, fax
S
scan troubleshooting cannot scan from a
partial document or photo
scanner unit does not close 261
scanning takes too long or freezes
scanner
Automatic Document Feeder
scanner glass
Index
300
scanner glass (flatbed)
Scanner Jam Access Cover
scanning to an FTP address creating shortcuts using the
creating shortcuts using the touch
using shortcut numbers 121 using the address book 121
Securely clearing disk space 237
serial printing
setting
setting up
setting up the printer on a wired network
on a wired network
shortcuts, creating
SMTP server not set up. Contact
Some held jobs were not
standard tray
status of supplies, checking 251
storing
subject and message information
supplies
system board
System busy, preparing resources
System busy, preparing resources
for job. Deleting held job(s). 238
T
telecommunication
touch screen
transparencies
tray linking 82 tray unlinking 82
trays
troubleshooting checking an unresponsive
checking an unresponsive
contacting Customer
solving basic printer
troubleshooting, copy
partial document or photo
poor scanned image quality 264
Index
301
scanner unit does not close 261
troubleshooting, display
display shows only
troubleshooting, fax
can receive but not send
can send but not receive
cannot send or receive a fax 265
received fax has poor print
troubleshooting, paper feed message remains after jam is
troubleshooting, print
incorrect characters print 259
jammed page does not
job prints from wrong tray 259 job prints on wrong paper 259
job takes longer than
multiple-language PDFs do not
tray linking does not work 260
unexpected page breaks
troubleshooting, print quality
characters have jagged
edges 274 clipped images 274 ghost images 274
toner fog or background
shading 282 toner rubs off 282
troubleshooting, printer options
flash memory card 271 hard disk with adapter 271
high capacity output
Internal Solutions Port 271 memory card 271
option not working 269 paper trays 269
troubleshooting, scan cannot scan from a
partial document or photo
scanner unit does not close 261
scanning takes too long or freezes
U
Universal Paper Size
Unsupported USB device, please
Unsupported USB hub, please
V
printing from Macintosh
viewing
W
Windows
wireless network installation 47
wired network setup
wired networking
wireless network
installation, using Macintosh 49
installation, using Windows 47
X
Index
302
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project